إصدار السوفتوير 2.02 دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsCalculatorsCasio fx-CG10/fx-CG20

CASIO ﻮﻴﺳﺎﻛ ﻲﳌﺎﻌﻟﺍ ﻲﻤﻴﻠﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﺐﻳﻮﻟﺍ ﻊﻗﻮﻣ

http://edu.casio.com

ﻊﻗﻮﳌﺍ ﻲﻓ ﺕﺎﻐﻟ ﺓﺪﻌﺑ ﺓﺮﻓﻮﺘﻣ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﺒﻴﺘﻛ

http://world.casio.com/manual/calc

fx-CG10

fx-CG20

fx-CG20 AU

2.02 ﺮﻳﻮﺘﻓﻮﺴﻟﺍ ﺭﺍﺪﺻﺇ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﳌﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (608 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪fx-CG10‬‬ ‫‪fx-CG20‬‬ ‫‪fx-CG20 AU‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺘﻮﻳﺮ ‪2.02‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪CASIO‬‬ ‫‪http://edu.casio.com‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪http://world.casio.
PAGE 2
‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ!‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬ ‫‪.9‬‬ ‫‪.10‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪1-1 ............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪1-3 .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪1-7 ..............................................................
PAGE 4
‫‪ .8‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪5-36 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ‪5-40 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ‪5-43 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ .11‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪5-48 ..................................................................
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪10-1 ................................................................................................... eActivity‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪10-2 .....................................................................................................eActivity‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪10-4 ..................................................................................................... eActivity‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪10-6 ....................................
PAGE 6
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻﹰ!‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻭﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻓﻮﺍﺭﻕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹶ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.
PAGE 7
‫‪ u‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ K‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ }‪ {LIST‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛـ‪.[OPTN]-[LIST] :‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ )‪ 6 (g‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (8-51‬ﲤﻨﺢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 8
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !o(OFF‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﲔ ‪ c‬ﻭ‪ ،h‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.o‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.1(Yes‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 9
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ a-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.RESTART‬‬‫ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 10
‫)‪ (2‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﲟﺮﻭﺭ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ RESTART‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (3‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ ،(A‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،Link‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪.4(CABLE)2(3PIN‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 12
‫‪ k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪log‬‬ ‫‪l‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪10x‬‬ ‫‪!l‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪al‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 13
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ m‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (d, e, f, c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻼﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪Table‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Recursion‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Conic Graphs‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‪.
PAGE 15
‫‪ k‬ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪ 6 ،1‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫‪ k‬ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺮﻭﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 21‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪ 8‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ ‪ 384‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﺎ × ‪ 216‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1.2E+12‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻝ ‪ 1.
PAGE 17
‫‪ k‬ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ /‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪ .................‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪456‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ ‫‪ ...............‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ ،0ABCDEF1(16) :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬ ‫)‪180150001(10‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ /‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .................‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‪12° 34’ 56.78” :‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 18
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ cos60‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪sin60‬‬ ‫‪Acga‬‬ ‫‪ddd‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ 369 × × 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪369 × 2‬‬ ‫‪Adgj**c‬‬ ‫‪dD‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ D‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ 2.362‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.sin2.362‬‬ ‫‪Ac.dgx‬‬ ‫‪ddddddd‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﳉﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 19
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫• ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ e‬ﺍﻭ ‪.d‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ e‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ d‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ f‬ﺍﻭ ‪ c‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺟﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:2‬‬ ‫‪Abcd+efgw‬‬ ‫‪cde-fghw‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪) f‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫‪) f‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺘﻴﻦ(‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ) ﺃﻭ ﻗﹼﺺ( ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ )ﺍﻟﻘﺺ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻱ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.!i (CLIP‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 22
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.!j(PASTE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫)‪!j(PASTE‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ !e(CATALOG‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﳊﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(CAT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "Math‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ "‪ "Input/Output‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (1-32‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺍﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ .
PAGE 24
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ‬ ‫)ﻭ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬ ‫) } (‪ !/‬ﻭ ) { (*!‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ(‬ ‫) ] (‪ !-‬ﻭ ) [ (‪!+‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ MATH‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MATH‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ"‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ 3‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 25
‫‪ u‬ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ MATH‬ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 26
1 1+ 0 x + 1dx ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ :3 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ Ab+4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx) v+b ea fb e w 2× 1 2 2 2 1 2 ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ Ac*4(MATH)1(MAT/VCT)1(2×2) vbcc ee !x(')ce e!x(')ceevbcc w 1-16 :4 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
PAGE 27
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺳﻬﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻟﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺪ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ )ﺍﻷﺱ(‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫'‬ ‫)'(‪!x‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻌﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫)'‪!((3‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ‬ ‫)'‪!M(x‬‬ ‫‪ex‬‬ ‫)‪!I(ex‬‬ ‫‪10x‬‬ ‫)‪!l(10x‬‬ ‫)‪log(a,b‬‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)2(logab‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)3(Abs‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)4(d/dx‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)5(d2/dx2‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)6(g‬‬ ‫)‪1(∫dx‬‬ ‫‪ Σ‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)6(g‬‬ ‫) (‪2(Σ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟ
PAGE 29
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ (w‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺇ ﹼﻣﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫"‪."Frac Result‬ﻋﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(1-32‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 31
‫‪ k‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﲔ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪b+cw‬‬ ‫‪*cw‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ "‪ "1+2‬ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ "1+3‬ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ‪.
PAGE 32
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪6 = 3‬‬ ‫‪4 × 5 10‬‬ ‫‪A6v4*5w‬‬ ‫)‪cos π = 1 (Angle: Rad‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Ac(!E(π)v3e)w‬‬ ‫‪log28 = 3‬‬ ‫‪A4(MATH)2(logab) 2e8w‬‬ ‫) (‬ ‫‪A!M(x') 7e123w‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪123 = 1.
PAGE 33
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.!m(SET UP)1(Math)J‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 4(MATH‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MATH‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(MAT/VCT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ … {2×2‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪2 × 2‬‬ ‫• }‪ … {3×3‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪3 × 3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪ m‬ﻭﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ‪) n‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(6 × 6‬‬ ‫• }‪ … {m×n‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• }‪ ... {2×1‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ‪2 × 1‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {3×1‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ‪3 × 1‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 34
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪×8‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪bebvceedde‬‬ ‫‪bdveeefege‬‬ ‫‪*iw‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻝ ‪Mat J‬‬ ‫‪!c(Mat)!-(Ans)a‬‬ ‫‪!c(Mat)a)(J)w‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ D‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 35
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪1 x 2− 1 x −1 dx‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫= ‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪Graph‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪mGraphK2(CALC)3(∫dx‬‬ ‫‪bveevx-bvce‬‬ ‫‪v-beaevw‬‬ ‫)‪6(DRAW‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪ .5‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )‪(OPTN‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.K‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ K‬ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪ .6‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ )‪(VARS‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪{V-WIN}/{FACTOR}/{STAT}/{GRAPH}/{DYNA}/{TABLE}/{RECURSION}/{EQUATION}/‬‬ ‫}‪{FINANCE}/{Str‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،FINANCE ،EQUATION‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ (4‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Program‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ‪ J‬ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.
PAGE 39
‫• }‪} ... {PTS‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ{‬ ‫• }‪ ... {y3}/{x3}/{y2}/{x2}/{y1}/{x1‬ﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {INPUT‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {sp}/{sx2}/{sx1}/{x¯ 2}/{x¯ 1}/{n2}/{n1}/{sx}/{x¯ }/{n‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ{‪}/‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ{‪/‬‬ ‫}ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{‪}/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪}/{1‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪}/{2‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪}/{1‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪/{2‬‬ ‫}ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪}/{1‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪}/{2‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪{p‬‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 40
‫‪ — TABLE u‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Pitch}/{End}/{Start‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{‪}/‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{‪}/‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {1*Result‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ‪ Result‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ TABLE‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Program‬‬ ‫‪ — RECURSION u‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ*‪, 1‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {FORMULA‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ{‬ ‫• }‪{an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}/ ...
PAGE 41
‫‪ .7‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪(PRGM‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ (PRGM‬ﺃﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Program‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪ .!J(PRGM‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪.(PRGM‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ (PRGM‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "Math‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ "‪ "Input/Output‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} .... {COMMAND‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{‬ ‫• }‪} ..... {CONTROL‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{‬ ‫• }‪} .............{JUMP‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ{‬ ‫• }?{ ‪} ...................‬ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ{‬ ‫• }^{ ‪} .
PAGE 42
‫‪ .8‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪.Run-Matrix‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ m!(SET UP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﹰ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 43
‫‪) Func Type u‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫ﲢﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ v‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫• }=‪} ... {X=}/{Parm}/{r=}/{Y‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ )‪}/{(Y= f (x‬ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ{‪/‬‬ ‫}ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﻚ{‪}/‬ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ )‪{(X= f (y‬‬ ‫• }‪ {y>f(x)}/{y}/{Y<}/{Yt}/{Ys‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫• }‪ {x>f(y)}/{x
PAGE 44
‫‪) List File u‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {FILE‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‬ ‫‪) Sub Name u‬ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Off}/{On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‪}/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‬ ‫‪) Graph Func u‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Off}/{On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‪}/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‬ ‫‪) Dual Screen u‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ(‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 45
‫‪) Slope u‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺭﻭﻃﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Off}/{On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‪}/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‬ ‫‪) Payment u‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {END}/{BEGIN‬ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ{‪}/‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ{ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫‪) Date Mode u‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ(‬ ‫• }‪ ... {360}/{365‬ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ }‪ {360}/{365‬ﻳﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻦ‬ ‫‪) Periods/YR. u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Semi}/{Annual‬ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ{‪}/‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ{‬ ‫‪Graph Color u‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 46
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.!h(CAPTURE‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪w‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ "‪ = n) "Capt n‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪ .10‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.5(RESET‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ ،1(SETUP‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(Yes‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Jm‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪.(12-4‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻴﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺣﻔﻈﺎ ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ fx-CG10‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪.fx-CG20/fx-CG20 AU‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ fx-CG20/fx-CG20 AU‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-CG10‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ eActivity‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﺛﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫‪ fx-CG20/fx-CG20 AU‬ﺑﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ -‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲡﺮﻯ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑـ ‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪56 × (–12) ÷ (–2.5) = 268.8‬‬ ‫‪56*-12/-2.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪100 ÷ 6 = 16.66666666...‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪100/6w‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪16.66666667‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP) ff‬‬ ‫‪1(Fix)ewJw‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP) ff‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪2(Sci)fwJw‬‬ ‫‪*1‬‬ ‫‪16.6667‬‬ ‫‪*1E+01‬‬ ‫‪1.6667‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP) ff‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪3(Norm)Jw‬‬ ‫‪16.66666667‬‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﰎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪200 ÷ 7 × 14 = 400‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪200/7*14w‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP) ff‬‬ ‫‪1(Fix)dwJw‬‬ ‫‪400.
PAGE 52
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﳉﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪A‬‬ ‫• ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪Pol (x, y), Rec (r, θ‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ )ﻛﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ،Σ‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‬ ‫‪d/dx, d2/dx2, ∫dx, Σ, Solve, SolveN, FMin, FMax, List→Mat, Fill, Seq, SortA, SortD, Min,‬‬ ‫‪Max, Median, Mean, Augment, Mat→List, DotP, CrossP, Angle, UnitV, Norm, P(, Q(,‬‬ ‫‪R(, t(, RndFix, logab‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ*‪List,
PAGE 53
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = ‪2 + 3 × (log sin2π2 + 6.8) = 22.07101691 (Rad‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫})‪exln 120 → ex{ln( 120‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺷﻴﺊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﻳﺤﻈﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ '‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ )´‪ (a´, c´, d‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ )‪.(a, c, d‬‬ ‫'‪3 + 11‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫' ‪3‬‬ ‫'‪2 10‬‬ ‫'‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪110‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫'‪2 × (3 – 2‬‬ ‫'‪5) = 6 – 4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ '‬ ‫'‪35‬‬ ‫' ‪2 × 3 = 148.492424 (= 105‬‬ ‫‪2)*1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ‬ ‫'‪150‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪= 8.
PAGE 55
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫‪78π × 2 = 156π‬‬ ‫‪ π‬ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪123456π × 9 = 3490636.164 (= 11111104 π)*3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪568‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪π = 105‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪824‬‬ ‫‪103‬‬ ‫‪129‬‬ ‫‪π *4‬‬ ‫‪1619‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ π‬ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪105‬‬ ‫‪258‬‬ ‫‪π = 6.533503684‬‬ ‫‪3238‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫*‪ 3‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻷﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ |‪ |106‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫*‪ 4‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻷﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(‪،‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫) ‪( 13‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫) ( ‪sin 2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪(2 × 1 ):‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪sin 2‬‬ ‫‪(sin 2 × 4 ):‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 57
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] w‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ[ ‪] a‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ[‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ‪ 123‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪Abcdaav(A)w‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 456‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ A‬ﻭ ﳋﺰﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪.B‬‬ ‫‪Aav(A)+efga‬‬ ‫‪al(B)w‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ X‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ a+(X‬ﺍﻭ ‪ .v‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ a+(X‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ ،X‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ v‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ‪ .x‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟـ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ x‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ‪ 10‬ﻟـ ‪ x‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ‪ 5‬ﻟـ ‪ .X‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟـ ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ "‪ "ABC‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ Str 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ Str 1‬ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)2(Line)J‬‬ ‫)‪A!a( A -LOCK)E(”)v(A‬‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ(‪l(B)I(C)E(”)a‬‬ ‫‪aJ6(g)5(Str)bw‬‬ ‫‪5(Str)bw‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[FUNCMEM‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪1‬‬ ‫)‪AK6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM‬‬ ‫‪2(RECALL)bw‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪ k‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ) w‬ﻭﺍﻻ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ w‬ﺧﻄﺄ( ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﺃﺳﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻔﺄ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪ .3‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫]‪[SET UP]- [Angle‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "‪ "Angle‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Gra}/{Rad}/{Deg‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{‪ }/‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{‪ }/‬ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )‪(Sci‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‬ ‫‪2(Sci)dw‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ )‪ 0 = n‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 0‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺒﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.10‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )‪(Norm 1/Norm 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 3(Norm‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ‪ Norm 1‬ﻭ ‪.Norm 2‬‬ ‫‪Norm 1: 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| >1010‬‬ ‫‪Norm 2: 10–9 (0.
PAGE 63
‫‪ .4‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ .K‬ﺗﺒﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Program‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ )‪(HYPERBL‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[HYPERBL‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {sinh}/{cosh}/{tanh‬ﺯﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ }ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ{‪}/‬ﺟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﻡ{‪}/‬ﺟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 64
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ )‪(ANGLE‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[ANGLE‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {g}/{r}/{°‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{‪}/‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{‪}/‬ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫• }” ’ ‪ ... {°‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪/‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫• }” ’ ‪ ... {°‬ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪/‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ }” ’ ‪ {°‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }(‪ ...
PAGE 65
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪ = 100‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫= ‪(90°‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫= )‪cos ( π rad‬‬ ‫)‪(0.5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)cccccc2(Rad)J‬‬ ‫‪c$!E(π)c3w‬‬ ‫>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<‬ ‫‪c(!E(π)/3)w‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)cccccc1(Deg)J 2 • sin 45° × cos 65° = 0.5976724775‬‬ ‫‪2*s45*c65w*1‬‬ ‫‪!s(sin–1) 0.
PAGE 66
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪K6(g)2(HYPERBL)1(sinh) 3.6w‬‬ ‫‪sinh 3.6 = 18.28545536‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪= 0.7953654612‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪K6(g)2(HYPERBL)5(cosh–1)$20c15w‬‬ ‫‪cosh–1‬‬ ‫>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<‬ ‫‪K6(g)2(HYPERBL)5(cosh–1)(20‬‬ ‫‪/15)w‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪!x(') 2e+!x(') 5wM‬‬ ‫'‬ ‫'‪2 +‬‬ ‫‪5 = 3.
PAGE 67
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ‪Ran#‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪(.‬‬ ‫)‪K6(g)3(PROB)4(RAND‬‬ ‫‪1(Ran#)w‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪Ran#‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪(.1‬‬ ‫)‪K6(g)3(PROB)4(RAND‬‬ ‫‪1(Ran#)1w‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪(.1‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪Ran# 0‬‬ ‫‪1(Ran#)0w‬‬ ‫‪Ran# 1‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻬﻴﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪1(Ran#)1w‬‬ ‫‪Ran# 1‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪(.
PAGE 68
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(Ranlnt#‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﹼﻮﻥ ‪ RanInt#‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﲔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1 < n < 999‬‬ ‫‪B – A < 1E10‬‬ ‫‪|A|,|B| < 1E10‬‬ ‫‪A
PAGE 69
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ )‪(RanBin#‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺛﺮﻱ ‪ n‬ﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪.p‬‬ ‫‪0
PAGE 70
‫‪ k‬ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ‬ ‫• ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ‪ θ‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ) –180°< θ < 180°‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ‪ r‬ﻭ ‪ θ°‬ﺣﲔ ‪ x = 14‬ﻭ ‪y = 20.7‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫→‬ ‫)‪24.98979792 (r‬‬ ‫) ‪55.92839019 (θ‬‬ ‫‪24.989‬‬ ‫‪55.928‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)cccccc‬‬ ‫‪1(Deg)J‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)(‪K6(g)5(ANGLE)6(g)1(Pol‬‬ ‫‪14,20.
PAGE 71
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ )‪ (GCD‬ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ )‪(LCM‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻝ ‪ 28‬ﻭ ‪35‬‬ ‫‪K6(g)4(NUMERIC)6(g)2(GCD) 28‬‬ ‫‪,35)w‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻝ ‪ 9‬ﻭ ‪15‬‬ ‫‪K6(g)4(NUMERIC)6(g)3(LCM) 9‬‬ ‫‪,15)w‬‬ ‫)‪(GCD (28, 35) = 7‬‬ ‫)‪(LCM (9, 15) = 45‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ )‪ ،(MOD‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ )‪(MOD_Exp‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ‪ 137‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪7‬‬ ‫‪K6(g)4(NUMERIC)6(g)4(MOD) 137‬‬ ‫‪,7)w‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ‪ 53‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪3‬‬ ‫)‪K6(g)4(NUMERIC
PAGE 72
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.1-13‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪$2c5e+!$(() 3e1c4w‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫––– = –– ‪–– + 3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<‬ ‫‪2$5+3$1$4w‬‬ ‫‪)*1‬ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ( ‪= 3.65‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪––––– + ––––– = 6.
PAGE 73
‫‪ k‬ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ )‪(AND, OR, NOT, XOR‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LOGIC‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ AND} ... {Xor}/{Not}/{Or}/{And‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{‪ OR}/‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{‪ NOT}/‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{‪ XOR}/‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟـ ‪ Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪ AND‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻟـ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺣﲔ ‪ A = 3‬ﻭ ‪B = 2‬؟‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪3aav(A)w‬‬ ‫‪2aal(B)w‬‬ ‫)‪av(A)K6(g)6(g‬‬ ‫‪4(LOGIC)1(And)al(B)w‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ‪ 0‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ )‪ K4(CALC‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫• }÷‪} ... {Simp}/{Rmdr}/{Int‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ{‪}/‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ{‪}/‬ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SolveN}/{∫dx}/{d2/dx2}/{d/dx}/{Solve‬ﺣﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ{‪}/‬ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ{‪}/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ{‪}/‬ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ{‪}/‬ﺣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪{f(x‬‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 75
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Simp‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪ "'Simp‬ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺴﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ ... {Simp} w‬ﺗﺒﺴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺴﻂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ ... {Simp} n w‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻝ ‪9‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪A$chcgdw‬‬ ‫‪K4(CALC)6(g)6(g)3(Simp)j‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ 'Simp‬ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﺘﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ "=‪"F‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Solve‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Solve‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 77
‫• ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫(‪Solve(, d2/dx2(, FMin(, FMax(, Σ‬‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.ListAns‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ "No Solution‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ "More solutions may exist.‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺏ ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ‪ ،Ax‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟـ )‪ f' (a‬ﻛـ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪f (a + Ax) – f (a‬‬ ‫––––––––––––– ⱌ )‪f ' (a‬‬ ‫‪Ax‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﻓﻲ ‪ x = 3‬ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪y = x3 + 4x2 + x – 6‬‬ ‫)‪ f(x‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪AK4(CALC)2(d/dx)vMde+evx+v-ge‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ x = a‬ﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪dw‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ a‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 2-28‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ .
PAGE 79
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[d2/dx2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ<‬ ‫‪K4(CALC)3(d2/dx2) f(x)ea‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪4(MATH)5(d2/dx2) f(x)ea‬‬ ‫>ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ<‬ ‫)‪K4(CALC)3(d2/dx2) f(x),a‬‬ ‫‪ a‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[∫dx‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = ‪(Deg‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﹼﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ ،f(x‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ X‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪(X, r, θ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ "‪ "tol‬ﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ "‪ ،"tol‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ ‪1E-5‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 83
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )‪ (α‬ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ ak‬ﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ )‪ (β‬ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪.ak‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ n‬ﻭﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺪﺩ ‪ ،n‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ‪.n = 1‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ β‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺃﻭﻝ ‪ α‬ﻭ ﺇﻻ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ Σ‬ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.
PAGE 84
‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ‪ n‬ﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻝ ‪ n‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺻﻞ )‪ (b‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫)‪ .(a‬ﻭﺍﻻ ﹼ ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 85
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ K3(COMPLEX‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {i‬ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪{i‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {Arg}/{Abs‬ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ } ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ{‪ }/‬ﺣﺠﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Conjg‬ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻖ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {ImP}/{ReP‬ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ{‪}/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ{ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ‬ ‫• }‪ ... {'a+bi}/{'r∠θ‬ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ }ﻗﻄﺒﻲ{‪ }/‬ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ{‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪ !a(i‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ )‪ K3(COMPLEX)1(i‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪ k‬ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪2∠30 × 3∠45 = 6∠75‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)cccccc‬‬ ‫‪1(Deg)c3(r∠θ)J‬‬ ‫‪Ac!v(∠)da*d‬‬ ‫‪!v(∠)efw‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺠﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-[Abs]/[Arg‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ a + bi‬ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﺔ ﻏﺎﻭﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ⎮ ‪ ⎮Z‬ﻭ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-[Conjg‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ‪ a + bi‬ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ‪.a – bi‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ‪2 + 4i‬‬ ‫)‪AK3(COMPLEX)4(Conjg‬‬ ‫‪(c+e1(i))w‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[COMPLEX]-[ReP]/[lmP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ‪ a‬ﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ ‪ b‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪,‬ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫]‪[SET UP]-[Mode]-[Dec]/[Hex]/[Bin]/[Oct‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Run-Matrix‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ .!m(SET UP‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ "Mode‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪ 4(Bin), 3(Hex), 2(Dec), ،‬ﺃﻭ )‪ 5(Oct‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 90
‫‪ u‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻝ ‪1100102‬‬ ‫)‪!m(SET UP‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ ،"Mode‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.4(Bin)J‬‬ ‫)‪A2(LOGIC)1(Neg‬‬ ‫‪bbaabaw‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "‪ "12016 and AD16‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‬ ‫)‪!m(SET UP‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ ،"Mode‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪ .8‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 3('MAT/VCT‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 26‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ‪ Mat Z‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ (Mat A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )‪ ،(MatAns‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲡﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 92
‫• }‪ ... {DEL-ALL}/{DELETE‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ } ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ{‪}/‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {DIM‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ({‬ ‫• }‪ ... {CSV‬ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻛﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )‪Mat A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Mat Z‬ﻭ ‪) (MatAns‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(2-48‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {M⇔V‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(2-60‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﲔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻭﹼﻻ )ﺍﳊﺠﻢ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 93
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(DELETE‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 1(ROW-OP‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SWAP‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... { Row‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... { Row+‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Row+‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ{‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻔﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪3‬‬ ‫)‪1(ROW-OP)3( Row+‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ‪*.‬‬ ‫‪ew‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪cw‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪dww‬‬ ‫* ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ )‪.(k‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪3‬‬ ‫)‪1(ROW-OP)4(Row+‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪cw‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ‬ ‫‪2(ROW)c‬‬ ‫)‪2(INSERT‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪2(ROW)cc‬‬ ‫)‪3(ADD‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {DELETE‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {INSERT‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 97
‫‪ k‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪CVS‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CVS‬ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫)‪ Mat A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ،Mat Z‬ﻭ ‪ .(MatAns‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )‪ Mat A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ،Mat Z‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ (MatAns‬ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪.CSV‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ ) "CSV‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(3-18‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 98
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،CSV‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪(2{3{4 → =2+3/4 :‬‬ ‫ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﹼ‬‫'(‬ ‫ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪3 → 1.732050808 :‬‬ ‫ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ' ﻭ ‪ :π‬ﹼ‬‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ‪CSV‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 4(CSV)3(SET‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 99
‫‪ u‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Mat‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a22 ... a2n‬‬ ‫‪a21‬‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫] ]‪= [ [a11, a12, ..., a1n] [a21, a22, ..., a2n] .... [am1, am2, ..., amn‬‬ ‫‪a12 ... a1n‬‬ ‫‪a11‬‬ ‫‪am2 ...
PAGE 100
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Dim‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)2(Dim‬‬ ‫‪6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ A‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.ListAns‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ }‪ {Dim‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 10‬ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪= A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫)‪baaK2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat‬‬ ‫‪av(A)!+( f )b,c‬‬ ‫‪!-( g )w‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "‪ "Vct‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ ،2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat‬‬ ‫‪av(A)!+( f )c,c‬‬ ‫‪!-( g )*fw‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "‪ "Vct‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Mat→Lst‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ Mat→List‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Mat]/[Identity‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ )ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ + A‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪:(B‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪A‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪B‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A)+‬‬ ‫‪1(Mat)al(B)w‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪) 1‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ × A‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪(B‬‬ ‫*)‪K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A‬‬ ‫‪1(Mat)al(B)w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻌﻬﻢ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 104
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Trn‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺻﻔﻮﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﻮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪= A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT/VCT)4(Trn)1(Mat‬‬ ‫‪av(A)w‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ‪-1‬ﺻﻒ × ‪-n‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ‪-n‬ﺻﻒ × ‪-1‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "‪ "Trn‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ‪-m‬ﺻﻒ × ‪-1‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪-1‬ﺻﻒ × ‪-m‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 105
‫‪ u‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺰﻝ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Rref‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪= A‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪−21‬‬ ‫‪−5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)5(Rref‬‬ ‫‪6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.
PAGE 106
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[x2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪= A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A‬‬ ‫‪xw‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]^[‬ ‫ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪= A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)av(A‬‬ ‫‪Mdw‬‬ ‫• ﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 107
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪= D‬‬ ‫‪1+i‬‬ ‫‪–2 + 2i‬‬ ‫‪–1 + i‬‬ ‫‪1+i‬‬ ‫)‪K6(g)4(NUMERIC)1(Abs‬‬ ‫‪K2(MAT/VCT)1(Mat)as(D)w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪i, Abs, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺄ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.
PAGE 108
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Run-Matrix‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪.3('MAT/VCT)6(M⇔V‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ‪) m :‬ﺻﻔﻮﻑ( × ‪) 1‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ‪) 1‬ﺻﻒ( × ‪) n‬ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﱠﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞﱟ ﻣﻦ ‪ m‬ﻭ ‪ n‬ﻫﻲ ‪.999‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 26‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ )ﻣﻦ ‪ Vct A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (Vct Z‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )‪ (VctAns‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 109
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3('MAT/VCT)6(M⇔V‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ... m × n‬ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ‪) m‬ﺻﻒ( × ‪) n‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ(‬ ‫‪ ... None‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DEL-ALL}/{DELETE‬ﺣﺬﻑ }ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ{‪}/‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DIM‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )‪ m‬ﺻﻔﻮﻑ × ‪ 1‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺻﻒ × ‪ n‬ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ(‬ ‫• }‪ ... {M⇔V‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(2-42‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ )ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ( ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 110
‫• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻫﻲ ‪ ±1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪VctAns → Vct α‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ α‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .Z‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺛﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 111
‫‪ u‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Vct‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪:(Vct A + Vct B‬‬ ‫] ‪Vct B = [ 3 4‬‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 1 2‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct‬‬ ‫‪av(A)+1(Vct)al(B)w‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪:(Vct A × Vct B‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫= ‪Vct B‬‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 1 2‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct‬‬ ‫‪av(A)*1(Vct)al(B)w‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪:(Mat A × Vct B‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫= ‪Vct B‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪
PAGE 112
‫‪ u‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[CrossP‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫] ‪Vct B = [ 3 4‬‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 1 2‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g‬‬ ‫‪3(CrossP( )1(Vct)av(A),‬‬ ‫‪1(Vct)al(B))w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[Angle‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ‬ ‫] ‪Vct B = [ 3 4‬‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 1 2‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT/VCT)6(g)6(g‬‬ ‫‪4(Angle( )1(Vct)av(A),‬‬ ‫‪1(Vct)al(B))w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT/VCT]-[UnitV‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍ
PAGE 113
‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻞ ‪ 11‬ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺗﻴﺮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺗﻴﺮﻱ‪.
PAGE 114
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CONVERT‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫}ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪} ' {2‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪}{1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﲢﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ{‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪ {1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪ {2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ ' ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺑﻂ ﺃﻣﺮﻱ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ )'(‪ 1‬ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪.
PAGE 115
‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ‬ ‫‪fm‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺮﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪cm3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫‪Å‬‬ ‫ﺍﳒﺴﺘﺮﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪mL‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪μm‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪cm‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪in3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ft3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫‪km‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪AU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪mm‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪m3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫)‪fl_oz(UK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻧﺲ‬ ‫)‪fl_oz(US‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪l.y.
PAGE 116
‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪°C‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪Pa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪kPa‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪°F‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪mmH2O‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪°R‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻧﻜﲔ‬ ‫‪mmHg‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪m/s‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪km/h‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪inH2O‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪knot‬‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪inHg‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ft/s‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪lbf/in2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪mile/h‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪bar‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺘ
PAGE 117
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 26‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﲤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 118
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ‪ 2 + 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ewc+dw‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 999‬ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) { (*! ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) } (‪ !/‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫) } (‪!*( { )g,h,i!/‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻚ‪.
PAGE 119
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪K1(LIST)1(List)b+‬‬ ‫‪K1(LIST)1(List)cw‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪ !b(List‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ )‪.K1(LIST)1(List‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪w‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)2(EDIT‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 120
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(g)5(INSERT‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ ،‬ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،0‬ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 121
‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Run-Matrix‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)2(Line)J‬‬ ‫‪!b(List) n!+( [ )a!-( ] )w‬‬ ‫)‪ = n‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(26‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "Off‬ﻟـ "‪ "Sub Name‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.
PAGE 122
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ !f(FORMAT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .
PAGE 123
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ ﻣﻌﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﻼﻳﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺯ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)1(TOOL)1(SORTASC‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ "‪ "How Many Lists?:‬ﻟﻴﺴﺄﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Run-Matrix‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﺛﻢ )‪ 1(LIST‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪{List}/{Lst→Mat}/{Dim}/{Fill(}/{Seq}/{Min}/{Max}/{Mean}/{Med}/{Augment}/{Sum}/{Prod}/‬‬ ‫}‪{Cuml}/{%}/{ΔList‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Lst→Mat‬‬ ‫‪> ...
PAGE 125
‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(n = 1 - 999‬‬ ‫‪> w‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ n> aK1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List) <1 - 26‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺕ<‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (0‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫)‪AfaK1(LIST)3(Dim‬‬ ‫‪1(List)bw‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺌﺖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇ ﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 126
‫‪ u‬ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Min‬‬ ‫‪> )w‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪K1(LIST)6(g)1(Min)6(g)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(36, 16, 58, 46, 56) 1‬‬ ‫)‪AK1(LIST)6(g)1(Min‬‬ ‫‪6(g)6(g)1(List)b)w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Max‬‬ ‫)‪> ,1(List‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪K1(LIST)6(g)2(Max)6(g)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26‬‬ ‫‪> )w‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪<1 - 26‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (36, 16, 58, 46, 56) 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(75, 89, 98, 72, 67) 2‬‬ ‫)‪AK1(LIST)6(g)4(Med‬‬ ‫‪6(g)6(g)1(List)b,‬‬ ‫‪1(List)c)w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Augment‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 128
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Cuml‬‬ ‫‪> w‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)3(Cuml)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 129
‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[ΔList‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪> w‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)5(ΔList) <1 - 26‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 130
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪AK1(LIST)1(List‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "‪."List‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ( 26‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 131
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ a‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (41, 65, 22) 3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪K1(LIST)1(List)da1(List)bw‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 1(LIST)1(List)d‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫) } (‪.!*( { )eb,gf,cc!/‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﲔ‪.
PAGE 132
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻙ ‪ .Y1 = List 1X‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ ،3 ،2 ،1‬ﻓﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.Y= 3X ،Y=2X ،Y=X :‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Table‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 133
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ‪.ListAns‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (41, 65, 22) 3‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ‪(List 3) sin‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪sK1(LIST)1(List)dw‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 26‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (26‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.
PAGE 134
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪CSV‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .CSV‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،CSV‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(g)6(g)1(CSV‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪CSV‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(2-42‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 135
‫‪ .4‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ )‪ 1(LOAD)1(LIST‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪.
PAGE 136
‫‪ u‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(g)6(g)1(CSV‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪.CSV‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.2(SAVE • AS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪.CSV‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "‪."ROOT‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(OPEN‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(SAVE • AS‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 137
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Equation‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SIMUL‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {POLY‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪{6‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SOLVER‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ{‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﳊﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻝ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﻭ ‪z‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪4x +‬‬ ‫‪y – 2z = – 1‬‬ ‫‪x + 6y + 3 z = 1‬‬ ‫‪– 5x + 4y + z = – 7‬‬ ‫‪m Equation 1‬‬ ‫‪1(SIMUL) 2‬‬ ‫)‪2(3‬‬ ‫‪ewbw-cw-bw 3‬‬ ‫‪bwgwdwbw‬‬ ‫‪-fwewbw-hw‬‬ ‫‪1(SOLVE) 4‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 10‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ‪.
PAGE 139
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳊﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ax2 + bx + c = 0 (a Þ 0) :‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻌﻴﺒﻴﺔ‪ax3 + bx2 + cx + d = 0 (a Þ 0) :‬‬ ‫…‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e = 0 (a Þ 0) :‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Equation‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) POLY‬ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.6‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪(x3 + 2x2 + 3x + 2 = 0 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ‪) Real :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(1-33‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ‪a + bi :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ‪r∠θ :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 10‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﲟﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻞ‪.
PAGE 141
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ "‪ "Rgt‬ﻭ "‪ "Lft‬ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﻞ‪*.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Rgt‬ﻭ ‪ Lft‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 142
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(5-15‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ )‪(1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪.Graph‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 144
‫‪ k‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ )‪(2‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪.Graph‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Graph‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫))‪ ،(Y=f(x‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ ))‪ ،(X=f(y‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)=‪ ...
PAGE 145
‫)‪ ... 2(Union‬ﳝﻸ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎﺀ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !f(FORMAT‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(5-15‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 146
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) V-Window‬ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ ،y‬ﻭﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪.‬ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻤﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪V-Window‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ,‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪.Graph‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !3(V-WIN‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.
PAGE 147
‫‪ u‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪V-Window‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻝ ‪ Tθ ptch‬ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ )ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Tθ max‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Tθ min‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ‪ Tθ ptch‬ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ (2π‬ﻛﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.V-Window‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 148
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !3(V-WIN‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.V-Window .‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 4(V-MEM)2(RECALL‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ V-Window‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .w‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ bw‬ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.
PAGE 149
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ ... !2(ZOOM)1(BOX‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﲤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ .......................... 2(FACTOR‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﻭﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ .......................... 3(IN)/4(OUT‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ )‪ ،y = (x + 5)(x + 4)(x + 3‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ V-Window‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Xscale = 2‬‬ ‫‪Xmax = 8,‬‬ ‫‪Xmin = –8,‬‬ ‫‪Yscale = 1‬‬ ‫‪Ymax = 2,‬‬ ‫‪Ymin = –4,‬‬ ‫‪m Graph 1‬‬ ‫‪!3(V-WIN)-iwiwcwc‬‬ ‫‪-ewcwbwJ‬‬ ‫)‪3(TYPE)1(Y=)(v+f)(v+e‬‬ ‫‪(v+d)w‬‬ ‫)‪6(DRAW‬‬ ‫‪!2(ZOOM)1(BOX) 2‬‬ ‫‪d~dw 3‬‬ ‫‪d~d,f~fw 4‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.
PAGE 151
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.K2(PAN‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ ) ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 152
‫‪ .5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ "?‪"V-Window values for specified background will be loaded. OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ g3p‬ﺃﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ ،Tθ min‬ﻭ‪ ،Tθ max‬ﻭ‪ Tθ ptch‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ ‪.g3p‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 153
‫‪ .6‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻃﻮﻻ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ "‪ "Background‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﹼ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻔﺔ )ﺑﻬﺖ ‪ (I/O‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Background‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻟـ‬ ‫‪) 0%‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ( ﺍﻟﻰ ‪) 100%‬ﻛﻞ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟـ ‪ 100%‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 154
‫‪ .3‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 3(TYPE‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }=‪ ...
PAGE 155
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ Xt3‬ﻭ‪:Yt3‬‬ ‫‪x = 3 sinT‬‬ ‫‪y = 3 cosT‬‬ ‫)‪) 3(TYPE)3(Param‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻲ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪)dsvw‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪(.x‬‬ ‫‪)dcvw‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪(.y‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪ Y1‬ﻭ‪ Y2‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻝ ‪ Y3‬ﻭ‪Y4‬‬ ‫‪Y1 = (x + 1), Y2 = x2 + 3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﲔ ‪ Y1°Y2‬ﻟـ ‪ ،Y3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Y2°Y1‬ﻟـ ‪.
PAGE 156
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ ،-1‬ﻭ ‪ ،0‬ﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ A‬ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Y = AX2‬ﻭ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫)=‪3(TYPE)1(Y‬‬ ‫‪av(A)vx-bw‬‬ ‫)‪J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A‬‬ ‫‪!.(=)-b)w‬‬ ‫)‪J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A‬‬ ‫‪!.(=)a)w‬‬ ‫)‪J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A‬‬ ‫‪!.(=)b)w‬‬ ‫)‪ffff1(SELECT‬‬ ‫)‪6(DRAW‬‬ ‫ﰎ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ "ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 157
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫"‪ "Line Style‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫"‪ "Line Color‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 158
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.4(TOOL)1(STYLE‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،y = 2x2 – 3‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ،Y1‬ﺍﻟﻰ "‪"Broken‬‬ ‫) (‪) 4(TOOL)1(STYLE)3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪(.
PAGE 159
‫‪ u‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﲔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ c‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 2(DELETE‬ﺃﻭ ‪.D‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻴﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ (Xt2‬ﺳﺘﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ،Yt2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ‪.(Xt2‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ‪ /‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 160
‫• ‪(Off :Label ،On :Axes) Line :Grid‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪.y‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Xscale‬ﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ "‪"Line‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Grid‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Yscale‬ﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪(Off :Grid ،Off :Label) Off :Axes‬‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪(Off :Grid ،Off :Label) Scale :Axes‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 161
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 4(TOOL)2(GPH-MEM)1(STORE‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪w‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ bw‬ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪.(G-Mem1) 1‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ‪ 20‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ G-Mem1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.G-Mem20‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 162
‫‪ k‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ ‪(g3p‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪.g3p‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ‬ ‫‪ PICT‬ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ Pict01.g3p‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.Pict20.g3p‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻃﻮﻻ‪.
PAGE 163
‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(OPEN‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(SAVE • AS‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻃﻮﻻ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (g3p‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ )‪ (g3p‬ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ Pict01.g3p‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(Pict20.
PAGE 164
‫‪ .5‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﲔ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 1(SELECT‬ﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ” ‪ “ R‬ﺃﻭ " ‪ " B‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻠﻞ ﺑـ " ‪ " B‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 166
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Run-Matrix‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Run-Matrix‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Input/Output‬ﺍﻟﻰ "‪."Linear‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ‪.
PAGE 167
‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Graph‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "‪ "Dual Screen‬ﺍﻟﻰ "‪."Off‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫) ] (‪ !-‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ , ... ,‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ,‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )=(‪ !.‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) [ (‪ ,!+‬ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 168
‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.T ,θ ,r ,Y ,X :‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ }‪ {3, 1, −1‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،1‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ‪ y = (List 1)x2 − 3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 170
‫‪ u‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Graph‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "‪ "Dual Screen‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪."Off‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ ‪ y = 2x2 + 3x – 4‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Y=X‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 171
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Table‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ y = 3x2 – 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪Y1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 172
‫‪ u‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻇﻠﻞ "‪ "Variable‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(LIST‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.x-‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،6‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .gw‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.6‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 173
‫‪ u‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ "‪ "Derivative‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "‪ "On‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫"‪ "dY/dX‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﰎ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‪.
PAGE 174
‫‪ k‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ ﺻﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫)‪K1(LISTMEM‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪bw‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ -3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ،3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪Y1 = 3x2 – 2, Y2 = x2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،Xmin = 0‬‬ ‫‪،Xmax = 6‬‬ ‫‪Xscale = 1‬‬ ‫‪،Ymin = –2‬‬ ‫‪،Ymax = 10‬‬ ‫‪Yscale = 2‬‬ ‫‪m Table 1‬‬ ‫‪!3(V-WIN)awgwbwc 2‬‬ ‫‪-cwbawcwJ‬‬ ‫‪3(TYPE)1(Y=)dvx-cw 3‬‬ ‫‪vxw‬‬ ‫‪5(SET)-dwdwbwJ 4‬‬ ‫‪6(TABLE) 5‬‬ ‫‪5(GPH-CON) 6‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 176
‫ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Y1 = 3x2 – 2‬ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ -3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ،3‬ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 177
‫‪ .8‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟـ ‪ A‬ﻓﻲ ‪ (Y = AX2‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 5(MODIFY‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.
PAGE 178
‫‪ k‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Dual Screen‬ﺍﻟﻰ "‪."Off‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ .
PAGE 179
‫‪-cw 9‬‬ ‫‪J 0‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ‪X = H + T‬؛‬ ‫‪ Y = K + AT2‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪ .A=2 ،H=0 ،K=0‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪H‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ -1‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ K‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ،-1‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﲟﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 3(PARAM‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 180
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .c‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪ K=0‬ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.-bw‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ) ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ( ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.K1(COPY‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 181
‫‪ .9‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻛﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Dyna Graph‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ ... 1(Cont‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫)‪ ...
PAGE 182
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ ،y = A (x – 1)2 – 1‬ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 5‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ .1‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﹼﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪m Dyna Graph 1‬‬ ‫‪!3(V-WIN)1(INITIAL)J 2‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)c2(Stop)J 3‬‬ ‫‪5(BUILT-IN)c1(SELECT) 4‬‬ ‫‪!f(FORMAT)b(Black) 5‬‬ ‫‪4(VAR)cwbw-bw 6‬‬ ‫‪2(SET)cwfwbwJ 7‬‬ ‫‪3(SPEED)3( )J 8‬‬ ‫‪6(DYNA) 9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 183
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ ،y = Ax‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ A‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪m Dyna Graph 1‬‬ ‫‪!3(V-WIN)1(INITIAL)J 2‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)cc1(On)J 3‬‬ ‫‪5(BUILT-IN)1(SELECT) 4‬‬ ‫‪4(VAR)bwaw 5‬‬ ‫‪2(SET)bwewbwJ 6‬‬ ‫‪3(SPEED)3( )J 7‬‬ ‫‪6(DYNA) 8‬‬ ‫→····‬ ‫····←‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪DOT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪ x-‬ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 184
‫‪ u‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ .5(STORE‬ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(RECALL‬ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 185
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺑـ‬ ‫‪ an+2 = an+1 + an‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪) a1 = 1, a2 = 1‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﺒﻮﻧﺎﺗﺸﻲ( ﻛﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.6‬‬ ‫‪m Recursion 1‬‬ ‫‪3(TYPE)3(an+2) 2‬‬ ‫‪4(n.an ··)3(an+1)+2(an)w 3‬‬ ‫‪5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwbwJ 4‬‬ ‫‪6(TABLE) 5‬‬ ‫* ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺘﲔ ﻟـ‬ ‫‪ a1 = 1‬ﻭ ‪.a2 = 1‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(FORMULA‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ "‪ "On‬ﻟـ "‪ "ΣDisplay‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺿﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.
PAGE 186
‫‪m Recursion 1‬‬ ‫‪!3(V-WIN)awgwbwc 2‬‬ ‫‪-bfwgfwfwJ‬‬ ‫‪3(TYPE)2(an+1)c2(an)+bw 3‬‬ ‫‪5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwJ 4‬‬ ‫‪)J 5‬‬ ‫(‪1(SEL+S)f2‬‬ ‫‪6(TABLE) 6‬‬ ‫‪5(GPH-CON) 7‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﳕﻂ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ"‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(5-15‬ﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 187
‫‪m Recursion 1‬‬ ‫‪!3(V-WIN)awcwbwc 2‬‬ ‫‪awewbwJ‬‬ ‫‪3(TYPE)2(an+1)a.j2(an)w 3‬‬ ‫‪4(n.an ··)3(bn)+a.b1(n)-a.cw‬‬ ‫‪5(SET)2(a1)bwbawbwbwJ 4‬‬ ‫‪6(TABLE) 5‬‬ ‫‪3(PHASE) 6‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ an‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ،bn‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪.
PAGE 188
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "ΣDisplay" "On‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 3(PHASE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ .........1(a • b‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ bn (bn+1, bn+2‬ﻭ )‪an (an+1, an+2‬‬ ‫)‪ .........
PAGE 189
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪an+1 = –3(an)2 + 3an, bn+1 = 3bn + 0.2‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ‪ ,‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ،Start = 0‬ﻭ ‪bnStr = 0.11 ،b0 = 0.11 ،anStr = 0.01 ،a0 = 0.01 ،End = 6‬‬ ‫‪m Recursion 1‬‬ ‫‪!3(V-WIN)awbwbwc 2‬‬ ‫‪awbwbwJ‬‬ ‫‪3(TYPE)2(an+1)-d2(an)x+d2(an)w 3‬‬ ‫‪d3(bn)+a.cw‬‬ ‫‪5(SET)1(a0) 4‬‬ ‫‪awgwa.abwa.bbwc‬‬ ‫‪a.abwa.
PAGE 190
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﳕﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ‪ x = 2y2 + y − 1‬ﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ‪ r = 4cosθ‬ﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪.
PAGE 191
‫‪ .12‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﳕﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻛﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ ... Sketch Line‬ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫• ‪ ...
PAGE 192
‫‪ .8‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪*.w‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳕﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Sketch Line‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "‪ "Plot/LineCol‬ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ 3‬ﻭﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ‪ .
PAGE 193
‫‪ .13‬ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ .!1(TRACE‬ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪*.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 194
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ ،G-Solve‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻨﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ aD‬ﺗﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻛـ ‪ d‬ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛـ ‪ s‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ .
PAGE 195
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Graph‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ .!2(ZOOM)6(g)3(ROUND‬ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪.Rnd‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ .!1(TRACE‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 196
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.!5(G-SOLVE)1(ROOT‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .w‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ‪.
PAGE 197
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻻﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﲔ ‪ Y1‬ﻭ‪.Y2‬‬ ‫‪Y1 = x + 1, Y2 = x2‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ )‪ (Y=f(x‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫))‪ Y > f(x‬ﺃﻭ )‪ Y < f(x‬ﺃﻭ )‪ Y ≥ f(x‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (Y ≤ f(x‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﲔ‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 198
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ ،!5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)1(∫dx‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ e‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 199
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،Y = sin X‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎ ‪ 21‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺬﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﹼﺘﲔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 200
‫‪ u‬ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.!5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)e(MIXED‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ‪c‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺫﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .w‬ﺣﺮﱢﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ d‬ﻭ‪ e‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 201
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !5(G-SOLVE‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {e}/{LENGTH}/{VERTEX}/{FOCUS‬ﺑﺆﺭﺓ{‪}/‬ﺭﺃﺱ{‪}/‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ{‪}/‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SYMMETRY}/{DIRECTX‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ{‪}/‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Y-ICEPT}/{X-ICEPT‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ‪}/{x-‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪{y-‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {RADIUS}/{CENTER‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ{‪}/‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 202
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ e‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ d‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﺃﺳﲔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ e‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ d‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ e‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ‪.
PAGE 203
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤ ﹼﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻷﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﲟﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 204
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫]‪[GRAPH]-[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪.(GRAPH1, GRAPH2, GRAPH3‬‬ ‫• ‪Graph Type‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 205
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(GRAPH)6(SET‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) StatGraph‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪ ... {GRAPH1}/{GRAPH2}/{GRAPH3‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ }‪{1}/{2}/{3‬‬ ‫• ‪) Graph Type‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Pie}/{NPPlot}/{xyLine}/{Scatter‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ{‪ xy}/‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ{‪}/‬ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ{‪} /‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 206
‫ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪NPPlot, Pie,‬‬ ‫‪Bar‬‬ ‫‪Hist, Broken‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪On‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Off‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X&Freq‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ X‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ X‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 207
‫• }‪ ... {Auto‬ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ }‪ {Auto‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ xyLine‬ﻭ ‪ ،NPPlot‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 208
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪) "Hist‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪) Hist Area‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Hist Border‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ "‪ "Off‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ "‪ "Link‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻴﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪) "MedBox‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺮﺑﻊ‪ -‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪) Outliers‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)ﻗﻴﻢ( ﻣﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ(‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 209
‫• ‪ ،D1 Area‬ﻭ‪ ،D2 Area‬ﻭ‪) D3 Area‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﻼﺀ ﻟـ ‪ ،Data1‬ﻭ‪ ،Data2‬ﻭ‪ Data3‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ ،D1 Border‬ﻭ‪ ،D2 Border‬ﻭ‪) D3 Border‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻟـ ‪ ،Data1‬ﻭ‪ ،Data2‬ﻭ‪ Data3‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 210
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻻﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟـ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 6-1‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 211
‫‪ k‬ﺭﹼﺝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﺩ ‪ XList‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ ‪ Freq‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻝ ‪ Freq‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫)‪w(Draw‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ‪-‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .
PAGE 212
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ]‪ ،[3] ،[2] ،[1‬ﻭ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳋﻄﻮﻁ ‪ 3 ،2 ،1‬ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃ ﹼﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ‪.
PAGE 213
‫⇒‬ ‫)‪w(Draw‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺈﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ –ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 214
‫‪ k‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Std‬ﻭ ‪OnData‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ‪ Q1‬ﻭ ‪ Q3‬ﻭ ‪ Med‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Q1Q3 Type‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Std u‬‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ n‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ‪ :‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .
PAGE 215
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪2+3‬‬ ‫‪= Q1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪7+8‬‬ ‫‪= Q3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)‪ (2‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Q1‬ﻭ ‪ Q3‬ﻭ ‪ Med‬ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪} = Q1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.25‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪{0.25‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 0.25‬ﲤﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Q1‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 216
‫‪OnData u‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Q1‬ﻭ ‪ Q3‬ﻭ ‪ Med‬ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪} = Q1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.25‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪{0.25‬‬ ‫‪} = Q3‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.75‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪{0.75‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﳌﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪(10 :‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1/10 = 0.1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2/10 = 0.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4/10 = 0.
PAGE 217
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ(‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ ‪xy‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ ‪.xy‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Scatter‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ( ﺍﻭ ‪) xyLine‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ‪ (xy‬ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪،‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 218
‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ -‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ‪.
PAGE 219
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ(ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ b‬ﻭ ‪ a‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ‪ y = ax + b‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 1(CALC‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .............
PAGE 220
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﺘﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻘﻠﹼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪1(CALC)3(Med‬‬ ‫)‪6(DRAW‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y = ax + b‬‬ ‫‪ ............ a‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪ ............
PAGE 221
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻌ ﹼﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ‪ y‬ﻛﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻝ ‪ .x‬ﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ‪،y = a + b × ln x‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻥ ‪ ،X = ln x‬ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ‪.y = a + bX‬‬ ‫)‪1(CALC)6(g)2(Log‬‬ ‫)‪6(DRAW‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪y = a + b·ln x‬‬ ‫‪ ............ a‬ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪ ............ b‬ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ‪ y‬ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ﻝ ‪ .
PAGE 222
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪ y‬ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻝ ‪ .x‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ ،y = a × xb‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .ln y = ln a + b × ln x‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ‪ ،X = ln x‬ﻭ ‪ , Y = ln y‬ﻭ ‪،A = ln a‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ‪.Y = A + bX‬‬ ‫)‪1(CALC)6(g)4(Power‬‬ ‫)‪6(DRAW‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y = a·xb‬‬ ‫‪ ............ a‬ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪............
PAGE 223
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪1 + ae–bx‬‬ ‫=‪y‬‬ ‫)‪1(CALC)6(g)6(g)1(Logistic‬‬ ‫)‪6(DRAW‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﺐ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ–‪ (y‬ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 224
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪.1(CALC)1(2-VAR‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺯﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ......... o‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪x‬‬ ‫‪ ....... Σy2‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪y‬‬ ‫‪ ........
PAGE 225
‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﰎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪2(CALC)6(SET‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .......
PAGE 226
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪-‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ -‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ"‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.2(CALC)2(2-VAR‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﻴﻤﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 227
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ )‪،(r‬ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )‪ (r2‬ﻭ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ )‪(MSe‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ )‪(r‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻲ‪ ، ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.
PAGE 228
‫‪n‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻮﺓ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪Σ (ln y – (ln a + b ln x )) ........................................‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫= ‪MSe‬‬ ‫‪n–2‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻮﺓ ﺟﻴﺒﻴﺔ ‪..........................................‬‬ ‫)) ‪Σ (y – (a sin (bx + c) + d‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻮﺓ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ‪.......................................
PAGE 229
‫‪ u‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﻛﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Statistics‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﶈﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 230
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Run-Matrix‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ K6(g)3(PROB)6(g‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }(‪ ... {P(}/{Q(}/{R‬ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ })‪ {P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(t‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• }(‪} ... {t‬ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟـ )‪{t(x‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )‪ R(t), P(t), Q(t‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻝ )‪ t(x‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 231
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪2(CALC)6(SET‬‬ ‫‪1(LIST)bw‬‬ ‫)‪c2(LIST)cw!J(QUIT‬‬ ‫)‪2(CALC)1(1-VAR‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،m‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،Run-Matrix‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ K6(g)3(PROB)6(g‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (PROB‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3(PROB)6(g)4(t() bga.
PAGE 232
‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Run-Matrix‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Run-Matrix‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ )‪.P (0.5‬‬ ‫‪m Run-Matrix 1‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)2(Line)J‬‬ ‫‪!4(SKETCH)1(Cls)w 2‬‬ ‫)=‪5(GRAPH)1(Y‬‬ ‫‪K6(g)3(PROB)6(g)1(P()a.
PAGE 233
‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .Run-Matrix‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (26‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 234
‫‪ k‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪TEST‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﳌﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪،Z‬ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ،t‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(6-33‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ z‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ p-‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )‪ µ‬ﺷﺮﻁ( *‪ ،≠ µ0‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺮﺽ ‪ ،µ0 = 0‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪،σ = 1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪ ،o = 1‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪.
PAGE 235
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻛﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ( ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.
PAGE 236
‫ﺗﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3(TEST‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 3(TEST)1(Z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) Z‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ(‬ ‫)‪ ................... 2(t‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) t‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(6-37‬‬ ‫)‪ ................... 3(CHI‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) χ2‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(6-40‬‬ ‫)‪ ...................
PAGE 237
‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪1(1-SAMPLE‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........ μ≠11.4‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ ............... sx‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ μ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.
PAGE 238
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .......... μ1≠μ2‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .............. sx1‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .............. sx2‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ μ1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 239
‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪4(2-PROP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .......... p1>p2‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ p1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪t‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪t‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.t‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 1(T‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.
PAGE 240
‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ t‬ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ t‬ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪.t‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪2(t‬‬ ‫)‪1(1-SAMPLE‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........ μ≠11.3‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ μ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.
PAGE 241
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .......... μ1≠μ2‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ ............... sp‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ μ1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ LinearReg u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪t‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪-‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺯﻭﺍﺝ )‪ (x, y‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪a,‬‬ ‫‪ b‬ﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪ .
PAGE 242
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(COPY‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [Resid List‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ ‪ LinearReg‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.t‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ β & ρ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑـ ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [Resid List‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .
PAGE 243
‫ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ..... Observed‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ (26‬ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ(‬ ‫‪ ...... Expected‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ (26‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪ ........ CNTRB‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (26‬ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﰋ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........
PAGE 244
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺧﻄﲔ ﻭﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(Mat‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ "‪ "Observed‬ﻭ"‪ "Expected‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.(Z‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2('MAT‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6('MAT‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 245
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 1(F‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.F‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ F‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(F‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻞ ‪ -‬ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 2(P‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.p-‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ p-‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(P‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 246
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ "Execute‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 1(CALC‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 6(DRAW‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 247
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ....(ERR) 4‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،df‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،SS‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪.MS‬‬ ‫‪ .................... F‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪F‬‬ ‫‪ .................... p‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪p-‬‬ ‫‪ .................. df‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ................... SS‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ................. MS‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ،B‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪ X-‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ .A‬ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪ Y-‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 248
‫ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) 3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) 2‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (3‬ﻛﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ A‬ﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ B‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ)‪ (A‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ‪P = 0.2458019517‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (p = 0.2458019517‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ )‪ ،(0.05‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ )‪ (B‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ‪P = 0.04222398836‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (p = 0.04222398836‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ )‪ ،(0.05‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 249
‫‪ .6‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ( ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ 95%‬ﻭ ‪ .99%‬ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻮﺳﻊ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻀﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺪﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪ .
PAGE 250
‫‪ u‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0 < C-Level < 1‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ C-Level‬ﻳﻌ ﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1 < C-Level < 100‬ﻳﻌ ﹼﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.100‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-1 u‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪ Z‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 251
‫‪-1 u‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ Z‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪4(INTR‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪3(1-PROP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪-2 u‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﲔ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﲔ ‪ Z‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 252
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪-2 u‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ‪t‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ‪ t‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪ t‬ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪.t‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪4(INTR‬‬ ‫)‪2(t‬‬ ‫)‪2(2-SAMPLE‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 253
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ x‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪ t-‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ x‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪ t-‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 254
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Stat Wind‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫"‪ ."Auto‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Stat Wind‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫"‪."Manual‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ P-CAL‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ p-‬ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ x‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ P-CAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪ ،t-‬ﻭ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪،χ‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪.
PAGE 255
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)1(NORM)2(Ncd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪x-‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 256
‫‪ k‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪t-‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪t-‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)2(t)1(tpd‬‬ ‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪ t-‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ )‪(p‬ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ x‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 257
‫• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪t-‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)2(t)3(Invt‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪ t-‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪) df‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪.t-‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)3(CHI)1(Cpd‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ )‪ (p‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 258
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)3(CHI)2(Ccd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ χ2‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪ χ2‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)3(CHI)3(InvC‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ χ2‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ χ2‬ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪) df‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 259
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪F‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪F‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)4(F)1(Fpd‬‬ ‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪ F‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪ (p) F‬ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 260
‫• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪F‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)4(F)3(InvF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ F‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ F‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ‪ d:df‬ﻭ ‪) n:df‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺴﻂ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ( ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪.
PAGE 261
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)5(BINOMIAL)2(Bcd‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ(‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ‪ ،x‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،p(x‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 262
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪) xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ( ﻭ ‪) `xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `(‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ xInv‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ xInv‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،`xInv‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ‪.
PAGE 263
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)6(g)1(POISSON)2(Pcd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﻘﻊ ‪ x‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )‪ p(x‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 264
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪) xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ( ﻭ ‪) `xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `(‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ xInv‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ xInv‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،`xInv‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ‪.
PAGE 265
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)2(Gcd‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ( ﻫﻲ ‪ ،x‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )‪ ،p(x‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 266
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪) xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ( ﻭ ‪) `xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ `(‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ xInv‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪xInv‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ ،`xInv‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ‪.
PAGE 267
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)6(g)3(HYPRGEO)3(InvH‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 268
‫‪ .8‬ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪ .................................. Data‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-1) µ‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ( ‪ ..............‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )"‪ "≠ µ0‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ‪ "< µ0" ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‪ "> µ0" ،‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪-2) µ1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ( ‪ ..........
PAGE 269
‫‪ ...................................Freq‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ )‪ 1‬ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(26‬‬ ‫‪ .................................Freq1‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ 1) 1‬ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(26‬‬ ‫‪ .................................Freq2‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ 1) 2‬ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(26‬‬ ‫‪ ............................. Execute‬ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ ........................................ o‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ ...................................... o1‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ ....................................... o2‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 270
‫‪ k‬ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ........................................ z‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪z‬‬ ‫‪ ........................................ p‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪p-‬‬ ‫‪ ......................................... t‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪t‬‬ ‫‪ ....................................... χ2‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫‪ ....................................... F‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪F‬‬ ‫̂‪ .........................................p‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ....................................... p̂1‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ .......................................
PAGE 271
‫‪ .
PAGE 272
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬k ‫ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬:Lower ‫ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬:Upper ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬ Lower, Upper = o + Z (α /2) · σ/' n ‫ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬Z ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‬-1 Lower, Upper = (o1 – o2) + Z(α /2) σ12/n1 + σ22/n2 ‫ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ‬Z ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‬-2 Lower, Upper = x/n + Z(α /2) 1/n · (x/n · (1 – x/n)) ‫ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬Z ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‬-1 Lower, Upper = (x1/n1 – x2/n2) + Z(α /2) (x1/n1 · (1 – x1/n1))/n1 + (x2/n2 · (1 – x2/n2))/n2 ‫ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ‬Z ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‬-2 Lower, Upper = o + tn−1(α /2) · sx/' n ‫ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬t ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‬-1 Lower, Upper = (o1 – o2) + tn1+n2−2 (α /2
PAGE 273
(‫ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬k ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ – p(x) = 1 e 2πσ (x – μμ)2 2σ (σ > 0) 2 – x2 df + 1 1+ Γ 2 df p(x) = × π × df df Γ 2 p= ∫ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ df+1 2 t-‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‬ Upper df p(x)dx p(x) = 1 × 1 2 df Γ 2 Lower ndf + ddf 2 p(x) = ndf ddf Γ ×Γ 2 2 Γ ndf ddf 2 df ×x 2 –1 – ×e x 2 χ2 ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ (x ⭌ 0) ndf ndf –1 2 x 2 – ndf + ddf 2 1 + ndf × x ddf F ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ (x ⭌ 0) ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬ p= ∫ Upper p(x)dx p= Lower tail = Central ∫ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ∞ p= p(x
PAGE 274
‫‪ k‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :n‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫)‪(x = 0, 1, ·······, n‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ :λ‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )‪( λ > 0‬‬ ‫)··· ‪(x = 0, 1, 2,‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫)··· ‪(x = 1, 2, 3,‬‬ ‫‪× N – MC n – x‬‬ ‫‪NC n‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪MC x‬‬ ‫‪p(x) = nC x p x(1–p)n – x‬‬ ‫‪e– λ × λ x‬‬ ‫!‪x‬‬ ‫= )‪p(x‬‬ ‫‪p(x) = p(1– p)x – 1‬‬ ‫= )‪p(x‬‬ ‫‪ :n‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺮﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ‪(0 % x‬‬ ‫‪ :M‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) A‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ‪(0 % M‬‬ ‫‪ :
PAGE 275
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺼﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (PV‬ﺍﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ )‪ (PRC‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 276
‫‪ k‬ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪Payment u‬‬ ‫• }‪ … {END}/{BEGIN‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ }ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ{‪}/‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ{‬ ‫‪Date Mode u‬‬ ‫• }‪ … {360}/{365‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ }ﻳﻮﻡ‪}/{365-‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪{360-‬‬ ‫‪) Periods/YR. u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ(‬ ‫• }‪} … {Semi}/{Annual‬ﺳﻨﻮﻱ{‪}/‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ{‬ ‫‪Graph Color u‬‬ ‫• }‪ … {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳋﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 277
‫‪ .2‬ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪I%‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪I%‬‬ ‫=‪i‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 365‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫=‪i‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 360‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫‪SI' = n × PV × i‬‬ ‫‪365‬‬ ‫‪SI' = n × PV × i‬‬ ‫‪360‬‬ ‫'‪SI = –SI‬‬ ‫) '‪SFV = –(PV + SI‬‬ ‫‪: SI‬‬ ‫‪: n‬‬ ‫‪: PV‬‬ ‫‪: I%‬‬ ‫‪: SFV‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(SIMPLE‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 278
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !1(TRACE‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ e‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ← (PV‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ )‪ ← (SI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ )‪ .(SFV‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ d‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 279
‫‪I %u‬‬ ‫‪) i‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ(‬ ‫‪) i‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ( ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PV + α × PMT + β × FV = 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ I %‬ﻣﻦ ‪) i‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ(‬ ‫)‪i × 100 ................................. (P/Y = C/Y = 1‬‬ ‫}‬ ‫)ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ( ‪–1 × C/Y × 100...‬‬ ‫‪P/Y‬‬ ‫‪C/Y‬‬ ‫) ‪(1+ i‬‬ ‫{{‬ ‫= ‪I%‬‬ ‫‪ .......... n‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........ FV‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........ I%‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........P/Y‬ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........ PV‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .......
PAGE 280
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ )‪ (n‬ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (PV‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ )‪ (FV‬ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ )‪ PV‬ﺍﻭ ‪ (FV‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 281
‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﻮﻡ )‪ (DCF‬ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺠﻤﻊ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﲟﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )‪(NPV‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )‪(NFV‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )‪(IRR‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ )‪(PBP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﻛﺎﳌﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪.
PAGE 282
‫‪PBP u‬‬ ‫‪CFk‬‬ ‫‪(1 + i)k‬‬ ‫)‪0 .................................. (CF0 > 0‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪Σ‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫= ‪NPVn‬‬ ‫‪=0‬‬ ‫‪NPVn‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ( ‪...‬‬ ‫–‪n‬‬ ‫‪NPVn+1 – NPVn‬‬ ‫{‬ ‫= ‪PBP‬‬ ‫‪ :n‬ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ‪ NPVn < 0‬ﺃﻭ ‪ NPVn+1 > 0‬ﺃﻭ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3(CASH‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(CASH‬‬ ‫‪ ....... I%‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ ......
PAGE 283
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻊ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪1 ............ PM1 ................... PM2 .......... Last‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ :a‬ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪(INT) PM1‬‬ ‫‪ :b‬ﺍﳊﺼﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪(PRN) PM1‬‬ ‫‪ :c‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪(BAL) PM2‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻊ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪1............. PM1................ PM2 .........
PAGE 284
‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "End‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪BAL0 = PV :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "Begin‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ PRN1 = PMT :‬ﻭ ‪INT1 = 0‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻲ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ )ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ I%‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ )'‪(I%‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 285
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} … {BAL‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ‪{PM2‬‬ ‫• }‪} … {INT‬ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪{PM1‬‬ ‫• }‪} … {PRN‬ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪{PM1‬‬ ‫• }‪} … {ΣINT‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪ PM1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪{PM2‬‬ ‫• }‪} … {ΣPRN‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪ PM1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪{PM2‬‬ ‫• }‪} … {COMPND‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ{‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 286
‫‪ .6‬ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪APR/100‬‬ ‫‪EFF = 1+‬‬ ‫‪–1 × 100‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪–1 × n ×100‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪ : APR‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ )‪(%‬‬ ‫‪ : EFF‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ )‪(%‬‬ ‫‪ : n‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪EFF‬‬ ‫‪APR = 1+‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 5(CONVERT‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪5(CONVERT‬‬ ‫‪ ......... n‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ .......
PAGE 287
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪MRG‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫–‪CST = SEL 1‬‬ ‫‪CST‬‬ ‫‪MRG‬‬ ‫–‪1‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪CST‬‬ ‫‪×100‬‬ ‫–‪MRG(%) = 1‬‬ ‫‪SEL‬‬ ‫= ‪SEL‬‬ ‫‪ : CST‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ : SEL‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‬ ‫‪ : MRG‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(COST‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪6(g)1(COST‬‬ ‫‪ ....... Cst‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........Sel‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‬ ‫‪ .......
PAGE 288
‫‪ .8‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﲔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(DAYS‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪6(g)2(DAYS‬‬ ‫‪ ......... d1‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ ......... d2‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ ......... D‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ ‪ d1‬ﺍﻭ ‪ .d2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 289
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 360 -‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 360‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ d1‬ﻭ ‪ d2‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺒﺮﺍﻳﺮ )ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ 28‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ 29‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ d2‬ﻛﻴﻮﻡ ‪.30‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ d1‬ﻫﻮﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺒﺮﺍﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪ d1‬ﻛﻴﻮﻡ ‪.30‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ d2‬ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ 31‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻭ ‪ d1‬ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ 30‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ 31‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪ d2‬ﻛﻴﻮﻡ ‪.30‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ d1‬ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ 31‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪ d1‬ﻛﻴﻮﻡ ‪.
PAGE 290
‫‪ u‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ – ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ – ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ )‪(SYD‬‬ ‫}‪{Y–1‬‬ ‫)‪n (n +1‬‬ ‫– ‪n' = n‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫)ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ '‪ + 2*n‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ '‪ +1)(n‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ '‪(n‬‬ ‫= '‪Z‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫}‪{Y–1‬‬ ‫×‬ ‫) ‪(PV – FV‬‬ ‫= ‪SYD1‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪n'– j+2‬‬ ‫)‪)(PV – FV – SYD1‬‬ ‫( = ‪SYDj‬‬ ‫)‪( j≠1‬‬ ‫'‪Z‬‬ ‫‪n'– (n +1)+2‬‬ ‫}‪12–{Y–1‬‬ ‫( = ‪SYDn+1‬‬ ‫× )‪)(PV – FV – SYD1‬‬ ‫)‪({Y–1}≠12‬‬ ‫'‪Z‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫=‪Z‬‬ ‫‪RDV1 = PV – FV – SYD1‬‬ ‫‪ : SYDj‬ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ ‪j‬‬ ‫‪ : RDVj‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ
PAGE 291
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} … {SL‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ j‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ{‬ ‫• }‪} .. {FP} ... {FP‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ j‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ{‬ ‫}‪} ..
PAGE 292
‫‪ : PRC‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﻛﻞ ‪ 100‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ : CPN‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻌﺮ )‪(%‬‬ ‫‪ : YLD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ )‪(%‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ )‪=1‬ﺳﻨﻮﻱ‪،‬ﻭ ‪=2‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ(‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : RDV‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪ 100‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 293
‫‪ ......... d1‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ )ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ(‬ ‫‪ ......... d2‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ(‬ ‫‪ ..... RDV‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪ 100‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ..... CPN‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ ..... PRC‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﻛﻞ ‪ 100‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ......YLD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﻮ ‪ 1‬ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ ‪ , 1902‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 31‬ﺩﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ ‪.2097‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 294
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ MEMO‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ,‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ )‪ (CPD‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Date Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ "‪."365‬‬ ‫‪ .11‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻟﺴﻨﺘﲔ )‪–730‬ﻳﻮﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺽ ‪ 300‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ .
PAGE 295
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﹼ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 296
‫‪m Program 1‬‬ ‫‪3(NEW)j(O)I(C)/(T)v(A)w 2‬‬ ‫‪!J(PRGM)4(?)aav(A)6(g)5(:) 3‬‬ ‫)^(‪c*!x(')d*av(A)x6(g)6(g)5‬‬ ‫‪!x(')c/d*av(A)Md‬‬ ‫‪JJ‬‬ ‫‪ 1(EXE) 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪w‬‬ ‫‪)hw‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪(A‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪7 = A‬‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪7 = A‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪ww‬‬ ‫‪baw‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪10 = A‬‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪10 = A‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪ww‬‬ ‫‪bfw‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪15 = A‬‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪15 = A‬‬ ‫‪w*1‬‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 297
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {BASE}/{RUN‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ{‪}/‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ{ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫•}‬ ‫{ ‪} ...‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SYMBOL‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ——‬ ‫)‪ … 1(RUN‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {BOTTOM}/{TOP‬ﺍﻋﻠﻰ{‪}/‬ﺍﺳﻔﻞ{ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SEARCH‬ﺑﺤﺚ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ{‬ ‫• }‪{RECURSION}/{TABLE}/{DYNA}/{GRAPH}/{LIST}/{MAT}/{STAT‬‬ ‫‪} ...‬ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺀ{‪}/‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ{‪}/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{‪}/‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ{‪}/‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ{‪}/‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ{‪}/‬ﻋﻮﺩﻳﺔ{ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 298
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ —— *)‪2(BASE‬‬ ‫* ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(BASE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑـ ‪ B‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪{TOP}/{BOTTOM}/{SEARCH‬‬ ‫• }‪{MENU‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {d~o‬ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{‪}/‬ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{‪}/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ{‪}/‬ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ{ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {LOGIC‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DISPLAY‬ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ }ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{‪}/‬ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{‪}/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ{‪}/‬ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• }‪{A⇔a}/{SYMBOL‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !J(PRGM‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ (PRGM‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 299
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺎ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻚ‪ .‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.......... 1(TOP‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪... 2(BOTTOM‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ "‪ "A‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺏ ‪OCTA‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 300
‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ )_( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 301
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ‪OCTA‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(g)1(SEARCH‬ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪6(g)1(SEARCH‬‬ ‫)‪j(O)I(C)/(T‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺻﻐﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ "Not Found‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .
PAGE 302
‫‪ u‬ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻛﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪.
PAGE 303
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻰ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (8-10‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ‪ USB‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ / PROGRAM /@MainMem/Storage Memory‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 304
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3(NEW‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‬ ‫(‪ 5‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ .
PAGE 305
‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬k .‫ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀﻩ‬c ‫ ﻭ‬f ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬،‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬.1 .2(EDIT) ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬.2 .‫ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬w ‫ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬.3 ."‫• ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻰ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬.5 ‫ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬k 8-27 ................................................RclCapt 8-15 ....................................................Break 8-24 ...........................................
PAGE 306
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫}ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺠﻌﺪﺓ{ ‪ ................‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍ‪‬ﻌﺪﺓ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻌﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ[ ‪ ..................‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ ..................‬ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﻙ ‪ (A,10, 10 + 20‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ‪ ........................
PAGE 307
‫‪) :‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﲔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻼﻓﺎ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ )^(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺑـ _ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫_ )ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 308
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪If ~ Then ~ IfEnd (1‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪ Then-‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪.IfEnd‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪.IfEnd‬‬ ‫)‪If ~ Then ~ Else ~ IfEnd (2‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪ Then-‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪.IfEnd‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪ Else-‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪.
PAGE 309
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ )‪ ،(0‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪.LpWhile-‬‬ ‫• ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،LpWhile-‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﳌﻔﺤﻮﺻﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪While~WhileEnd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(‪.
PAGE 310
‫‪Prog‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،RUN-MAT‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪" :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" ‪Prog‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪Prog "ABC" :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 311
‫‪Stop‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪Stop :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻧﺎﺷﻰﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ )‪(JUMP‬‬ ‫‪) Dsz‬ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ‪ ،1‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 312
‫‪) Isz‬ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ‪ ،1‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫^‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ≠ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪> :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< ‪Isz‬‬ ‫>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ = ‪0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ A :‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪θ ،r ،Z‬‬ ‫]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ ‪ : lsz A‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ A‬ﺑـ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ‪ ،1‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮﻫﺎ )ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ(‪ .
PAGE 313
‫‪Menu‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>, :‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪>", <1‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( ‪>", "<1‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(<" ‪Menu‬‬ ‫>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪>", , ... , "", <2‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( ‪"<2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ،(9‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(θ ،r ،Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ >ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪>",
PAGE 314
‫‪ClrMat‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ< ‪ClrMat‬‬ ‫‪ClrMat‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ A :‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪Ans ،Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻟـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ClrText‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ClrText :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ClrVct‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪.
PAGE 315
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪DrawGraph‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ‪ bn) an‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (cn‬ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ‪ n‬ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ,‬ﻣﻊ ‪ bn) an‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (cn‬ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ‪n‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.
PAGE 316
‫‪PlotPhase‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪ x-‬ﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪.y-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ‪>,
PAGE 317
‫‪Locate‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 318
‫(‪Receive( / Send‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>) :‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<(‪>) / Send‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<(‪Receive‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ( ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ -‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‬ ‫‪OpenComport38k / CloseComport38k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬ ‪) 3-pin COM‬ﺍﳌﺴﻠﺴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻣﺮ ‪ Receive38k/Send38k‬ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 319
‫‪ k‬ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻛـ "‪ ("123‬ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ )ﻛـ "‪ ("x-1‬ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪) Locate‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8-23‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻀﻤﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )"( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‪ (\) .
PAGE 320
‫(‪StrInv‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>"[)] :‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(‪StrInv‬‬ ‫(‪StrJoin‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ "<1‬ﻭ ">ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪."<2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>"[)] :‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪>", "<2‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪StrJoin("<1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "‪) "+‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8-27‬‬ ‫(‪StrLeft‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺴﺞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ n‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>", n[)] :‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(‪StrLeft‬‬ ‫)‪ n ،0 < n < 9999‬ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬ ‫(‪StrLen‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ(‪.
PAGE 321
‫(‪StrRotate‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ‪.n‬‬ ‫)‪ n ،–9999 < n < 9999‬ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>", [,n)] :‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(‪StrRotate‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ "‪ "n‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ "‪ "n‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫"‪ "n‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ‪.+1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ........ StrRotate("abcde", 2) :‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ "‪"cdeab‬‬ ‫(‪StrShift‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﳝﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪.
PAGE 322
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻧﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪:RUN‬‬ ‫‪Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow, ColorAuto, ColorClr‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow :BASE‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪ !f(FORMAT)) !f(FORMAT)b(Color Command‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 323
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫">ﻧﺺ<" )"ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ"‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) Locate ،(8-30‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) SetG-Color ،(8-23‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(8-32‬‬ ‫‪) Plot/Line-Color‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(8-32‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .
PAGE 324
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺭﻓﺎﻗﻪ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫"‪"CASIO‬‬ ‫‪CASIO‬‬ ‫‪?→X‬‬ ‫?‬ ‫‪" X =" ? → X‬‬ ‫?=‪X‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 325
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ )‪(`Row‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫_ ‪`Row 4, A, 2‬‬ ‫ﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪Mat A‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ )‪(`Row+‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ،4‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻒ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 326
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪V-Window‬‬ ‫_‪View Window –5, 5, 1, –5, 5, 1‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫_‪ .................... Y = Type‬ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 327
‫>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< ‪SketchThick‬‬ ‫>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< ‪SketchBroken‬‬ ‫>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< ‪SketchDot‬‬ ‫>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< ‪SketchNormal‬‬ ‫>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< ‪SketchThin‬‬ ‫>ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ‪>, ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ‪>, ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ< ‪Inverse‬‬ ‫‪ ..................
PAGE 328
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 329
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬ ‫)‪SortA (List 1, List 2, List 3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺯﺓ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‬ ‫)‪SortD (List 1, List 2, List 3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺯﺓ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 330
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ "MedBox‬ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ*(‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪) Whisker‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ*(‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻓﺎﺕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ*(‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ )ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ* ﺃﻭ ‪(ColorAuto‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ )‪(ColorNormal, ColorLighter‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ "Bar‬ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭﹼﻝ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )‪ Length‬ﺃﻭ ‪(
PAGE 331
‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪S-Gph1 DrawOn, Linear, List 1, List 2, List 3, Blue‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻟﻸﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ "‪ "Linear‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ ‪Linear .................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻲ ‪Log ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪Med-Med .........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺳﻲ ‪ExpReg(a·eˆbx) ..........................................
PAGE 332
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫]‪DrawDistNorm , [,σ, µ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ*‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ*‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ µ = 0‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 333
‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫>‪DrawDistChi , ,
PAGE 334
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪1-Variable List1, List 2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪(Frequency‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪(XList) x-‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫‪2-Variable List 1, List 2, List 3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪(Frequency‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪(YList) y-‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪(XList) x-‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪LinearReg(ax+b) List 1, List 2, List 3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪(Frequency‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ*‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪(YList) y-‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪(XList)
PAGE 335
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪LogisticReg List 1, List 2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪(YList) y-‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪(XList) x-‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺣﺬﻓﺖ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ )] [(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،µ=0 ،σ=1‬ﻃﺮﻑ=‪(Left) L‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(6-69‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫(‪ :NormPD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 336
‫• ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪t-‬‬ ‫(‪ :tPD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪) t-‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪tPD(x, df [)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ‪ .x‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ ‪Ans‬‬ ‫)‪ ListAns‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ x‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ :tCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ‪) t-‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪tCD(Lower,Upper,df [)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،p‬ﻭ ‪ ،tLow‬ﻭ ‪tUp‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،p‬ﻭ ‪ ،tLow‬ﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 337
‫• ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪F‬‬ ‫(‪ :FPD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪) F‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪FPD(x,ndf,ddf [)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ‪ .x‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ ‪ListAns) Ans‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ :FCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪) F‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪FCD(Lower,Upper,ndf,ddf [)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ListAns) Ans‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 338
‫• ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ‬ ‫(‪ :PoissonPD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪PoissonPD(x, λ[)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ‪ .x‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ ‪ListAns) Ans‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ :PoissonCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪PoissonCD([Lower,] Upper, λ[)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪) Ans‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 339
‫• ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫(‪ :HypergeoPD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻴﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪HypergeoPD(x, n, M, N[)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻝ ‪ .x‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ ‪ListAns) Ans‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ :HypergeoCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻴﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪HypergeoCD([Lower,] Upper, n, M, N[)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .
PAGE 340
‫‪ :TwoSampleZTest‬ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪-Z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪TwoSampleZTest "µ1 condition", σ1, σ2, o1, n1, o2, n2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ‪ z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2‬ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫‪ ListAns‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫]]‪TwoSampleZTest "µ1 condition", σ1, σ2, List1, List2[, Freq1 [, Freq2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ‪ z, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪z, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1,‬‬ ‫‪ n2‬ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ ListAns‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 341
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫‪:ChiGOFTest‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ chi-Square goodness‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ChiGOFTest List 1, List 2, df, List 3‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 2‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪(CNTRB‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ‪ χ2, p, df‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ ListAns‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ CNTRB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪:ChiTest‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.
PAGE 342
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, Bdf, Bss, Bms, BF, Bp, ABdf, ABss, ABms, ABF,‬‬ ‫‪ ABp, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRms‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪Adf, SSa, MSa,‬‬ ‫‪Fa, pa, Bdf, SSb, MSb, Fb, pb, ABdf, SSab, MSab, Fab, pab, Edf, SSe,‬‬ ‫‪.MSe‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻝ ‪ MatAns‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 343
‫• ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ P/Y‬ﻭ ‪ C/Y‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ P/Y=12‬ﻭ ‪.C/Y=12‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ )(‪Cmpd_n(, Cmpd_I%‬‬ ‫‪,(Cmpd_PV(, Cmpd_PMT(, Cmpd_FV(,‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ )ﺍﳊﺠﺞ( ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ )‪ , n, I% ,PV‬ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪.‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 344
‫‪:Amt_ΣINT‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ‪ PM1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.PM2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪Amt_ΣINT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y‬‬ ‫‪ :Amt_ΣPRN‬ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ‪ PM1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.PM2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪Amt_ΣPRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪:Cnvt_EFF‬‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 345
‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬.
PAGE 346
RANGE Σan+2 Σbn Σbn+1 Σbn+2 Σcn Σcn+1 Σcn+2 a0 a1 GRHCLR Σa n+2 Σb n Σb n+1 Σb n+2 Σc n Σc n+1 Σc n+2 Sel_a 0 Sel_a 1 SetG-Color_ 1 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ LIST MAT/VCT COMPLEX CALC List Lst→Mat Dim Fill( Seq Min Max Mean Med Augment Sum Prod Cuml % ΔList Mat Mat→Lst Det Trn Augment Identity Dim Fill( Ref Rref Vct DotP( CrossP( Angle( UnitV( Norm( i Abs Arg Conjg ReP ImP 'r∠θ 'a+bi Solve d/dx d2/dx2 ∫ dx SolveN FMin ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ List_ List→Mat( Dim_ Fill( Seq( Min( Max( Mean( Median( Augment( Sum_ Prod_ Cuml_ Percent_
PAGE 347
TMPR VELOCITY MASS FORCE PRESSURE ENERGY POWER s min h day week yr s-yr t-yr °C K °F °R m/s km/h knot ft/s mile/h u mg g kg mton oz lb slug ton(short) ton(long) N lbf tonf dyne kgf Pa kPa mmH2O mmHg atm inH2O inHg lbf/in² bar kgf/cm² eV J calth cal15 calIT kcalth kcal15 kcalIT I-atm kW•h ft•lbf Btu erg kgf•m W calth/s hp ft•lbf/s [s] [min] [h] [day] [week] [yr] [s-yr] [t-yr] [°C] [K] [°F] [°R] [m/s] [km/h] [knot] [ft/s] [mile/h] [u] [mg] [g] [kg] [mton] [oz] [lb] [slug] [ton(short)] [ton(long)] [N]
PAGE 348
CASH AMORTZN CONVERT COST DAYS BOND J ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ 2 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ 3 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ 1 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ V-WIN X Y T,θ R-X R-Y R-T, θ FACTOR STAT I% PV PMT FV NPV IRR PBP NFV BAL INT PRN ΣINT ΣPRN EFF APR Cost Sell Margin PRD PRC YLD Xfct Yfct X Y min max scale dot min max scale min max pitch min max scale dot min max scale min max pitch n x Σx Σx2 σx sx minX maxX y Σy Σy2 Σxy Cmpd_I%( Cmpd_PV( Cmpd_PMT( Cmpd_FV( Cash_NPV( Cash_IRR( Cash_PBP( Cash_NFV( Amt_BAL( Amt_INT( Amt_PRN( Amt_ΣINT( Amt_ΣPRN( Cnvt_EFF( Cnvt_APR(
PAGE 349
a2 b0 b1 b2 C0 C1 C2 anStart bnStart CnStart EQUATION FINANCE Result SimRes SimCoef PlyRes PlyCoef n I% PV PMT FV P/Y C/Y Str 1 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ COMMAND CONTROL JUMP ? ^ CLEAR DISPLAY a2 b0 b1 b2 c0 c1 c2 a n Start b n Start c n Start R_Result Sim_Result Sim_Coef Ply_Result Ply_Coef n I% PV PMT FV P/Y C/Y Str_ !J(PRGM) ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ 2 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ 3 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ If Then Else IfEnd For To Step Next While WEnd Do LpWhile Prog Return Break Stop Lbl Goto ⇒ Isz Dsz Menu Text Graph List Mat Vct Stat Graph Dyna FUNCTAB RECRTA
PAGE 350
ENG SKT/LIN On Off Eng — — ····· ······ — DRAW DERIV BACK FUNC SIMUL SGV-WIN LIST LOCUS TBL-VAR ΣDISP RESID COMPLEX FRAC Y=SPEED DATE PMT PERIODS INEQ SIMP Q1Q3 Connect Plot On Off None Pict OPEN On Off On Off Auto Manual File On Off Range List On Off None List Real a+bi r∠θ d/c ab/c Norm High 365 360 Begin End Annual Semi Intsect Union Auto Manual Std OnData P/L-CLR EngOn EngOff Eng S-L-Normal S-L-Thick S-L-Broken S-L-Dot S-L-Thin G-Connect G-Plot DerivOn DerivOff BG-None BG-Pict_ *8 (8-58 ‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
PAGE 351
BASE ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ 4(MENU) ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ 2 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ 3 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ 1 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ d~o LOGIC DISPLAY d h b o Neg Not and or xor xnor 'Dec 'Hex 'Bin 'Oct ? ^ RELATNL : ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ d h b o Neg_ Not_ and or xor xnor 'Dec 'Hex 'Bin 'Oct !J(PRGM) ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ 2 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ 3 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ 1 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ Prog JUMP 3 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ Lbl Goto ⇒ Isz Dsz Menu = ≠ > < ≥ ≤ *1 Exp *2 MARK STICK %DATA None COLOR LINK *3 X *4 EXP *5 NORM ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ Prog_ Lbl_ Goto_ ⇒ Isz_ Dsz_ Menu_ ? ^ = ≠ > < ≥ ≤ : t CHI F BINOMIAL POISSON GEO 1 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ Dec He
PAGE 352
‫ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬7* ‫( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬K6(g)1(CONVERT) .‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫" ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‬OPEN" ‫ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬8* ‫ﻠﹼﺪ ﻭ‬‫ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍ‬.‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ :‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‬ ."Pict\Pict01.
PAGE 353
‫‪ .8‬ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ⇔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8-7‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻲ )_( ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 354
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ .
PAGE 355
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ e^ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ e^ Int Int Not Not ‫ﻧﺺ‬ Intg ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ Intg ∑xy Plot Sigmaxy Plot ‫ﻧﺺ‬ Det Det Arg Arg Conjg Conjg ReP ReP ImP ImP ^ ^ × ½ Lbl Lbl or or Fix Fix d/dx( d/dx( ! ! Sci Sci d /dx ( d^2/dx^2( r rad Dsz Dsz Solve( Solve( minY minY Isz Isz Σ( Sigma( minX minX Factor Factor FMin( FMin( n Statn ViewWindow ViewWindow FMax( FMax( Line Line 2 2 sinh−1 sinh^−1 Goto Goto Seq( Seq( cosh −1 cosh^−1 Prog Prog Min( Min( tanh−1 ta
PAGE 356
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ Or Or r Graphr Financial PMT Not Not Xt GraphXt Financial FV Xor Xor Yt GraphYt X GraphX PV Financial PV PMT FV List1 Σan+ Sigmaan+1 List2 List2 1 Σbn+ Sigmabn+1 SSb SSb List3 List3 Σcn+1 Sigmacn+1 SSab SSab List4 List4 Σan+2 Sigmaan+2 MSb MSb List5 List5 Σbn+ Sigmabn+2 MSab MSab List6 List6 Σcn+ Sigmacn+2 [ns] [ns] List1 1 2 2 Q1 Q1 Int÷ Int/ [µs] [micros] Q3 Q3 Rmdr Rmdr [ms] [ms] x1 x1 Fa Fa [s]
PAGE 357
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ [mm] [mm] [cm] [m] ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ Logistic [cal15] [cal15] [cm] [kcal15] [kcal15] [m] [kcalth] [kcalth] Pie Pie [km] [km] [kcalIT] [kcalIT] Bar Bar [Mil] [Mil] If If DotG [in] [in] Then Then 1-Variable [ft] [ft] Else Else [yd] [yd] [fath] [fath] [rd] [rd] To To QuadReg QuadReg [mile] [mile] Step Step CubicReg CubicReg [n mile] [n_mile] QuartReg QuartReg [acre] [acre] While While LogReg LogReg [ha] [ha] WhileEnd WhileEnd
PAGE 358
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ BG-None BG-Pict ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ BG-None BG-Pict ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ File6 File6 Y=DrawSpeedNorm Y=DrawSpeedNorm Y=DrawSpeedHigh Y=DrawSpeedHigh ‫ﻧﺺ‬ VarList VarList ClrMat ClrMat ZoomAuto ZoomAuto GridOff GridOff GridLine GridLine FuncOn FuncOn Xdot Xdot GridOn GridOn SimulOn SimulOn RightXdot R-Xdot Exp(a·b^x) Exp(a^bx) AxesOn AxesOn D Var CoordOn CoordOn DrawDistT DrawDistT LabelOn DrawDistChi DrawDistChi DrawDistF DrawDistF D Var DrawDistNorm DrawDistNorm Q1Q3Type
PAGE 359
‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ InvTCD( InvTCD( ‫ﻧﺺ‬ Days_Prd( Days_Prd( ChiPD( ChiPD( OneSampleZTest OneSampleZTest ChiCD( ChiCD( TwoSampleZTest TwoSampleZTest InvChiCD( InvChiCD( OnePropZTest OnePropZTest FPD( FPD( TwoPropZTest TwoPropZTest FCD( FCD( OneSampleTTest OneSampleTTest InvFCD( InvFCD( TwoSampleTTest TwoSampleTTest BinomialPD( BinomialPD( LinRegTTest LinRegTTest BinomialCD( BinomialCD( ChiGOFTest ChiGOFTest InvBinomialCD( InvBinomialCD( ChiTest ChiTest PoissonPD( Po
PAGE 360
‫‪ .9‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪ ،A‬ﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻤﻪ ﺑـ ‪ (2, 3, 5, 7......) B‬ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.A‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.A‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.B > A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﲟﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 361
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﶈﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ( ﻟـ ‪.X‬‬ ‫‪ :Y1‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫‪ :Y2‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫‪ :Y3‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ :Y4‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ :Y5‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟـ ‪ Y3‬ﻭ ‪Y4‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪ Y1‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 362
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺬ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Spreadsheet‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Spreadsheet‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ .
PAGE 363
‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 60‬ﻛﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪) eActivity‬ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪15‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.eActivity‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ eAcitivity‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 364
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫• }‪ ... {GRAB‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ GRAB‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {$‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ )‪.($‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {:‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )‪.(:‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {If‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ (‪.CellIf‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {CELL‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• (‪CellMin(, CellMax(, CellMean(, CellMedian(, CellSum(, CellProd‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {RELATNL‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ≤ ‪=, ≠, >, <, ≥,‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 365
‫‪ u‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.1(FILE)2(OPEN‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.1(DELETE‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪ "SHEET‬ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻪ‪.
PAGE 366
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.1(FILE)5(CSV)2(SAVE • AS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪.CSV‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "‪."ROOT‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ CSV‬ﻓﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ)‪.1(OPEN‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.1(SAVE • AS‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ .
PAGE 367
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 368
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ ‪JUMP‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)1(GO‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )‪ A1‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ (Z999‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )↑‪.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)2(TOP‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ‪ A‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )←‪.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)3(TOP‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )↓‪.2(EDIT)4(JUMP)4(BTM‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ‪ Z‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )→‪.
PAGE 369
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ(‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻮﻧﺎ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻧﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﲟﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 370
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،A1×2 ،sin30 ،7+3‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=( ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ sdaw‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﹰ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪) 0.5‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Deg‬ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 371
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪1st Cell‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ )‪ ،B2 ،A1‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ .‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪(B1) al(B)bw :‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻧﺰﻭﻻ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 372
‫‪ u‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪TOTAL‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪PRICE‬‬ ‫‪QUANTITY‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪525‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪780‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1560‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﺴﻄﺮ ‪ ،1‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ A2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.B4‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ ،C2‬ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟـ ‪.A2 × B2‬‬ ‫‪!.(=)av(A)c*al(B)cw‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ C2‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ C3‬ﻭ ‪ .C4‬ﻭ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ C2‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 373
‫‪ u‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪GRAB‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ B1‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪!.(=)1(GRAB)d1(SET)+fw‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ )‪ 2(GO‬ﺍﻟﻰ )→‪ 6(BTM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(GRAB‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﹼﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ )‪ 1(GO‬ﺍﻟﻰ )→‪ 5(BTM‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ‪ .JUMP‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪ JUMP‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.9-7‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 374
‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﻒ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !f(FORMAT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ b(Char Color‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ b‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 375
‫‪ k‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (9-6‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.2(EDIT)2(COPY‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 376
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﺺ ﺍﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ B1:C1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ =B1+5‬ﻭ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ .B2:C2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ =B2+5‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻗﺺ ﻭﻟﺼﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 377
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ‪ B1, B2 ،B3‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ .B1‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 378
‫‪ k‬ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(9-7‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪ Syntax ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 379
‫‪ u‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ ،2‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،B2:C4 ،A2:A4‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﳝﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 380
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Spreadsheet‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Spreadsheet‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ,) CellSum‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ,(Celllf‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Spreadsheet‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ "ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ" ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ )] [( ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ‪.
PAGE 381
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫(‪CellMedian‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(‬ ‫(‪CellSum‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(‬ ‫(‪CellProd‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪5(CELL)4(Med) :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪[)] :‬ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪:‬ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(‪CellMedian‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪=CellMedian(A3:C5) :‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪.A3:C5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 382
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ (A1<0‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ( ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(g)5(CONDIT‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ "‪ "Condition‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(COND1‬ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻁ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)‪ 2(COND2‬ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻁ ‪.
PAGE 383
‫• ‪Expression :Type‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ (CelMin(A1:B10)≤C1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻛﺎﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ ،A1×30>100‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ A1‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ ،CellSum(B1:B30) ≤A1‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ A1‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ )‪ ،A1
PAGE 384
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ "Format‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(SETFORM‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ‪ FORMAT‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (9-13‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ "‪."Format‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﹼﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.6‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .
PAGE 385
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟـ ‪ ،V1‬ﻭ ‪ V2‬ﻭ ‪.Value‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .w‬ﺍﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪ 4(C≠h‬ﺃﻭ )‪ 3(C=h‬ﻟـ "‪ ،"Expre‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ )‪ 2(ERROR‬ﺃﻭ )‪3(BLANK‬‬ ‫ﻟـ"‪."Value‬‬ ‫ )‪ ... 2(ERROR‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ "‪ "ERROR‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ...
PAGE 386
‫ )‪ ... 2(ERROR‬ﺗﺪﺧﻞ "‪ "ERROR‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬‫‪ .A1=ERROR‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ "‪ "ERROR‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ )‪ A1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ )‪ ... 3(BLANK‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ "‪ "BLANK‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ )‪ ... 4(And‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ "‪ "And‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ ... 5(Or) -‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ "‪ "Or‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ‪.
PAGE 387
‫‪ u‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪.B3:C4‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(g)5(CONDIT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ (Expression) "Expre‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪.6(g)1(C
PAGE 388
‫‪ .5‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ‪ x-‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ‪.y-‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 389
‫‪ k‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 390
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪Frequency‬‬ ‫‪Mark Type‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ )‪ 1(1‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ j‬ﺍﻭ‬ ‫‪ (h,‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 391
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)2(CALC)6(SET‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 392
‫‪ k‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ GRPH‬ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ .CALC‬ﻭ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 393
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺷﺮﻳﻄﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (6-3‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Pie‬‬ ‫‪Category‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Category‬ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ StatGraph‬ﺍﳌﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 394
‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪.6(g)1(GRAPH)6(SET‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "‪ "Category‬ﻭ ‪ "Data‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ‪ A1:A5‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻟـ "‪ "Category‬ﻭ ‪B1:B5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﲔ ﻟـ "‪."Data‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ "Graph Type‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.4(Pie‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫"‪ "Color Link‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(Cat‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.
PAGE 395
‫‪ .6‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪Spreadsheet‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫)‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(θ ،r ،Z‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 396
‫‪ u‬ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.A1:A10‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)3(STORE)2(LIST‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫"‪ "Cell Range‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "]‪."List[1~26‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ (26‬ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 397
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 398
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ eActivity‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ .eActivity‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ "ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ eActivity‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﹼﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺏ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻄﻼﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ eActivity‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 399
‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.eActivity‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ ...............‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ...‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ ،Run-Matrix‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ‪ ............‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ..
PAGE 400
‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ )ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ( ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )*( ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... *{FILE‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {SAVE‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬ﹰ‬ ‫• }‪ ... {SAVE • AS‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {OPT‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.11-13‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 401
‫• }‪ ... {COLOR‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ COLOR‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {MARKER‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10-10‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {CHAR‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10-11‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {MEMO‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ MEMO‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {INSERT‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DELETE‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {Catalog‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {VIEW‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 402
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺍﺣﺮﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ Z, {,}, ’, ~, 0‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪A‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(OPEN‬ﺃﻭ ‪.*w‬‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.3(DELETE‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ "?‪.
PAGE 403
‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ .eActivity‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫"ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪) "eActivity‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (10-4‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 404
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪ "CALC‬ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ F3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪ 3(CALC‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ }‪ {INSERT‬ﺛﻢ }‪ {TEXT‬ﺳﻴﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 405
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ "‪ "CALC‬ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ .F3‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻰ "‪."CALC‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪ "TEXT‬ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ F3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪3(CALC‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 406
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ }‪ {'MAT/VCT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ eActivity‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .Run-Matrix‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(2-42‬ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ eActivity‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 407
‫‪ u‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ }‪ {INSERT‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ }‪ {STOP‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺺ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)5(COLOR)1(MARKER‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 408
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)5(COLOR)2(CHAR‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﻤﺎﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﹼ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ d‬ﻭ ‪ e‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 409
‫‪ u‬ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)1(INSERT‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)1(INSERT‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .w‬ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌ ﹼﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 410
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ .6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)4(VIEW‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)4(VIEW‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪3(DETAIL‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 411
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪.eActivity‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ × ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫)ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪(a) 384 × 216‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (1-36‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟـ ‪48‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ eActivity‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(b) 384 × 192‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 412
‫‪ u‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(g)3(INSERT)4(PICTURE‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.5(INSERT)4(PICTURE‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ g3p‬ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ‪ PICT‬ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 413
‫‪ u‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.!f(FORMAT‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .w‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.1‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .
PAGE 414
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪) Run-Matrix‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Run-Matrix‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ .eActivity‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪(.
PAGE 415
‫‪ u‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.2(STRIP‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ"‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10-17‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ "‪) "Graph‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(Graph‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 416
‫‪ .8‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪x – 1 :‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫= ‪(Y‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(DRAW‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ ،eActivity‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‬ ‫(‪.!a‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 417
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...{JUMP‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ JUMP‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ))‪ (1(TOP‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ))‪ (2(BOTTOM‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ))‪ ،(3(PageUp‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫))‪.(4(PageDown‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DEL-LINE‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {INSERT‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {MATH‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪) MATH‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(1-14‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 418
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ eActivity‬ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‬ ‫(‪.!a‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ )‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ !a‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ eActivity‬ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‬ ‫‪.w‬‬ ‫(‪ .!,‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.
PAGE 419
‫‪ k‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ eActivity‬ﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ fx-CG10/fx-CG20/fx-CG20 AU‬ﹼﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟـ "‪ ."g3e‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ fx-CG10/fx-CG20/fx-CG20 AU‬ﳊﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ eActivity‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻹﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ "‪ "g3e‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 420
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ eActivity‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪ 29,000‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ *.‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﻌﻠﻪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 29,000‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(FILE)4(CAPACITY‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 421
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،eActivity‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،(g3p‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ "ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ"‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .
PAGE 422
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .(AAAABBBBCC.txt>AAAABB~1.
PAGE 423
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ" ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ"‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (13-12‬ﻭ "ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 424
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫‪RECURSION‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫‪PICTPLOT‬‬ ‫‪PROGRAM‬‬ ‫‪S-SHEET‬‬ ‫‪_SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫‪SETUP‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫‪STAT‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫‪STRING‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺭﺩﹼ
PAGE 425
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪.csv‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪CSV‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "No Data‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 4(FOLDER) 1(MKEFLDR‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.
PAGE 426
‫ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 5(DETAIL‬ﻭ ‪ e‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ g3p‬ﺍﻭ ‪ ،g3b‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 427
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(SELECT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ )‪ (c‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(SELECT‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺳﻴﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫)‪1(SELECT‬‬ ‫←‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 428
‫‪ k‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.2(COPY‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ "‪ "ROOT‬ﻫﻮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪ ROOT‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ‪.
PAGE 429
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،g1m :‬ﻭ ‪ ،g2m‬ﻭ ‪ ،g3m‬ﻭ ‪ ،g1r‬ﻭ ‪ .g2r‬ﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻷﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "‪.
PAGE 430
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻹﳊﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،.g1m‬ﻭ‪ ،.g2m‬ﻭ‪ ،.g3m‬ﻭ‪ ،.g1r‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .g2r‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(11-7‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 431
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪4(BACKUP‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪1(SAVE‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ "Memory Full‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻹﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 432
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Memory‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪4(BACKUP‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪2(LOAD‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪*.w‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 433
‫‪ k‬ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﺰﺃﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.
PAGE 434
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪} ... 1(DISPLAY‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 2(PWRProp‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 3(LANGUAGE‬ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 4(VERSION‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 5(RESET‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 6(g)1(BattSet‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 6(g)2(UserName‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ{‬ ‫• )‪} ...
PAGE 435
‫‪ k‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(PWRProp‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ 10} ... 1(10Min‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ{ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‬ ‫• )‪ 60} ... 2(60Min‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ{‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ )‪ !J(QUIT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(PWRProp‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 436
‫‪ k‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ LANGUAGE‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3(LANGUAGE‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.1(SELECT‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ )‪ !J(QUIT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 437
‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ VERSION‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 4(VERSION‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺘﺔ(‬‫ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪ .3‬ﺇ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ )‪ !J(QUIT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 438
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 439
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(g)2(ALL‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ,‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 440
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻳﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪ .
PAGE 441
‫‪ u‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(g)2(UserName‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.2(DELETE‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ "‪."Password‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .
PAGE 442
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .Link‬ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {TRANSMIT‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {RECV‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {EXAM‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {CABLE‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 443
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇ ﹼ ﻣﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ g3p‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ bmp‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ )‪.!h(CAPTURE‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ ... 6(CAPTURE)1(Memory‬ﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.g3p‬‬ ‫)‪ ... 6(CAPTURE)2(BMP‬ﲢﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.bmp‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 444
‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ‪ USB‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎﹰ‪،‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 445
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(USB Flash‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ "Preparing USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ .Windows‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Windows Explorer‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 446
‫‪ k‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ‪ @MainMem‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.
PAGE 447
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ROOT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﹼﺪ‬ ‫‪@MainMem‬‬ ‫‪ROOT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪DYNA MEM‬‬ ‫‪EQUATION‬‬ ‫‪FINANCIAL‬‬ ‫‪STAT‬‬ ‫‪SYSTEM‬‬ ‫‪TABLE‬‬ ‫‪Y=DATA‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪@MainMem‬‬ ‫‪DYNA MEM.g3m‬‬ ‫‪EQUATION.g3m‬‬ ‫‪FINANCE.g3m‬‬ ‫‪STAT.g3m‬‬ ‫‪SYSTEM.g3m‬‬ ‫‪TABLE.g3m‬‬ ‫‪Y=DATA.
PAGE 448
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ‪ ،@MainMem‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ "‪ "SAVE-F‬ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫"‪ "Memory ERROR‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ )‪ (.g3a/.g3I‬ﻓﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ‪ ،@MainMem‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .
PAGE 449
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻨﺸﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪) .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ"‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ‪ ،@MainMem\PROGRAM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ‪ Windows‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ TextEdit‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ‪Mac‬‬ ‫‪.OS‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 450
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ :Windows‬ﺃﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ" ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ ‪ ."USB‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻦ"‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ :Mac OS‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 451
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺁﻟﺘﲔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ *SB-62‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻛـ ‪.3PIN‬‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Link‬‬ ‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ ،4(CABLE‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.
PAGE 452
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 2(RECV‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﳊﲔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(TRANSMIT‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 453
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ .6(TRANSMIT‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 1(Yes‬ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫• )‪ ... 6(No‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 454
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 455
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )‪(fx-CG10/fx-CG20/fx-CG20 AU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ‪.
PAGE 456
‫‪ u‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )‪.(fx-CG10/fx-CG20/fx-CG20 AU‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ)‪ (Y=DATA‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ fx-9860GII‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﲔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪.
PAGE 457
‫‪ .3‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ CASIO‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://edu.casio.com/support/projector/‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.
PAGE 458
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺓ ]‪ [F1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ]‪ [F6‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[OPTN‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (K‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.
PAGE 459
‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 460
‫‪3(Draw) u‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪1:Point‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪2:Line Segment‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪3:Infinite Line‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪4:Ray‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪5:Vector‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪6:Circle‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻮﺱ‬ ‫‪7:Arc‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫)‪8:SemiCirc (Diam‬‬ ‫‪3e(Draw Spec) u‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬ ‫‪1:Triangle‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ‬ ‫‪2:Isosc Triangle‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪3:Rectangle‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪4:Square‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ
PAGE 461
‫‪5(Transform) u‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪1:Reflection‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪2:Translation‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ‬ ‫)‪3:Trans(Sel Vec‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪4:Rotation‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪5:Dilation‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪6:Symmetry‬‬ ‫‪6(Animate) u‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻴﺌﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪1:Add Animation‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﺸﻴﺌﲔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪2:Replace Anima‬‬
PAGE 462
‫‪K(Option)e(Properties) u‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪1:to the front‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪2:to the back‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪3:All TEXT‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪4:Fade I/O‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ ‪(g3p‬‬ ‫‪5:Store Picture‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) ( ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 463
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.1(File) – 1:New :‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.1(Yes‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.1(File) – 2:Open :‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 464
‫‪ u‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.1(File) – 2:Open :‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪.1(DELETE‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 465
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (g3p‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﺖ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،g3p‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ g3p‬ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪.(14-37‬‬ ‫• ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ g3p‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 466
‫‪ k‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ (g3p‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )‪.(g3p‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫)]‪.K(Option)e(Properties) – 5:Store Picture w(Pict [1~20‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 467
‫‪ k‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(14-41‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(14-1‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(14-31‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ‬ ‫)ﻳﺼﻠﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﻠﻌﺎﺕ‪(.
PAGE 468
‫‪ .2‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻀﻠﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪) .‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ ،([F3](Draw‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)‪([F3][g](Draw Spec‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪([F2](Edit‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪) .
PAGE 469
‫‪ u‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.3(Draw) – 1:Point :‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺑـ "~"‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.3(Draw) – 2:Line Segment :‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 470
‫‪ u‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.3(Draw) – 3:Infinite Line :‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.3(Draw) – 4:Ray :‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 471
‫‪ u‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.3(Draw) – 6:Circle :‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 472
‫‪ u‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.3(Draw) – 8:SemiCirc (Diam) :‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﳝﺮ ﹼ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪w‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 473
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻸ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ,‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﹼﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.
PAGE 474
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.3e(Draw Spec) – 5:Polygon :‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 475
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.3e(Draw Spec) – 6:Regular n-gon :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 12‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14-15‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻀﻠﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.3e(Draw Spec) – 7:Function f(x) :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 476
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ )ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ,‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ o‬ﺃﻭ ‪ J‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﹼ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺎ‪ .
PAGE 477
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ x‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.2(Edit) – 4:Select Figure :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ o‬ﺍﻭ ‪ J‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﹼ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ .k‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ k‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 478
‫‪ k‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.2(Edit) – 2:Select All :‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ !f(FORMAT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 479
‫‪ .4‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (14-19‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.!f (FORMAT‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻈﻬﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 480
‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.4(Construct) – 2:Perpendicular :‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﳝﺮ ﹼ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 481
‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﲔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.4(Construct) – 4:Intersection :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺨﻄﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺘﲔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧﻂ ‪ ,‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 482
‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.4(Construct) – 6:Parallel :‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﳝﺮ ﹼ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ) (‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 483
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.4(Construct) – 8:Attached Angle :‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ ،"Select Display Position‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫→‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 484
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻠﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪ x-‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪ y-‬ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.5(Transform) – 2:Translation :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 485
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻘﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.5(Transform) – 4:Rotation :‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪."Sel Rotation Center‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﹼ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 486
‫‪ .5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻟـ ‪ 0.1 < | x | < 10‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪2 :‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪-1 :‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪0.5 :‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 487
‫‪ k‬ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ * ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.2(Edit) – 1:Undo/Redo‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪) 2(Edit) – 6:Clear All :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 488
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.v‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 489
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ .‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ D‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.2(Edit) – 5:Delete :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.2(Edit) – 6:Clear All :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 490
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 491
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ "Axes‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)‪1(On‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)‪2(Off‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫)‪3(Scale‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ .
PAGE 492
‫‪ k‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ )‪ (Xmin‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ )‪(Xmax‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪ y-‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪) 1:2‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ :x-‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ ،(y-‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪ y-‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.(Ymid‬‬ ‫‪Ymid‬‬ ‫‪Xmin‬‬ ‫‪Xman‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪.!3 (V-WIN‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟـ ‪ ،Xmin‬ﻭ ‪ ،Xmax‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 493
‫‪ .4‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ )ﲢﺮﻳﻚ( ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.1e(View) – 3:Scroll :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 494
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﳌﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.1e(View) – 4:Zoom In :‬‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ -‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.1e(View) – 5:Zoom Out :‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ -‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.1e(View) – 6:Zoom to Fit :‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 495
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 31‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻱ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14-30‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 496
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 497
‫‪ .6‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 14‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺎﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 498
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‪/‬ﻃﻮﻝ‪،‬ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ‪،‬ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪،‬ﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ‪،‬ﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪،‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪،‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪،‬ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪،‬ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﲤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ‪.
PAGE 499
‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ /‬ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ‪ .
PAGE 500
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 501
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ‪ ABCD‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ،A‬ﻭ ‪ ،D‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ،A‬ﻭ ‪ ،D‬ﻭ ‪C‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ،A‬ﻭ ‪ ،D‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 502
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻨﺠﻤﲔ )``( ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪ AC‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪.BC‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪) ∠ACB‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 503
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14-47‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ )ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ (14-47‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 504
‫‪ k‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺑـ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ" ﻧﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﹼﺎ ﻧﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﻧﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (14-45‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻣﻘﻔﻼ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 505
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ "ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻔﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14-41‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺎﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫]‪ [Unlock‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 506
‫‪ k‬ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪/‬ﻃﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪،‬ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 507
‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ v‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14-30‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪!j(PASTE‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.
PAGE 508
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 14‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳊﺬﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.o‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﹼ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 509
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.K(Option) – 2:Expression :‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ "= ‪ "EXPR‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ )@( ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،@1 :‬ﻭ ‪،@2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺬ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ )‪ ،DCB (@1‬ﻭ )‪ ACD (@2‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 510
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ ABC‬ﻭﻣﺜﻠﺚ ’‪ A’B’C‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻸ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ "‪ .
PAGE 511
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.+‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ f‬ﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ew‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "’‪ "@2 DA’B’C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ "‪) "@2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟـ ’‪ (DA’B’C‬ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ’‪DABC+DA’B’C‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 512
‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻫﻮ "‪ ."Fix2‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(2-12‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 513
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﻭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪،‬ﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪/‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 514
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺃﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ!‬ ‫• ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ" ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 515
‫‪ .6‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪ 90‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪.jaw‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪ AB‬ﻭ ‪ 90 DE‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻘﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Jo‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪ DE‬ﻭ ‪ ،DC‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ dw‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ e‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪ DE‬ﻭ ‪ DC‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 516
‫‪ .14‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.6(Animate) – 3:Trace :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) D‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ (13‬ﻛـ "ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .15‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.6(Animate) – 5:Go (once) :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪ AB‬ﻫﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ C‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 517
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ E‬ﲤﺮ ﹼ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪AB‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ "Steps‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.(1 STEPS‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ E‬ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪AB‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 518
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪E‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ ،"E‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﲢﺖ "‪."Animations‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪1(DELETE‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ E‬ﻭﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ "‪) "E‬ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻗﻴﻢ "‪"t0‬ﻭ‬ ‫"‪ "t1‬ﲢﺘﻪ( ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﲢﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”‪“Animations‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪1 (DELETE‬‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪D‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 519
‫‪ k‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﺖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ ,،‬ﻗﻮﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .20‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ )‪ ،(x،y‬ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪/‬ﻃﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺤﺬﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )‪ ،(x،y‬ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 520
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Add Table‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪ CD‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻲ "‪."Length‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﳉﻌﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ‪ ،CD‬ﻭ ‪ ،DE‬ﻭ ‪ CE‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 521
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.6(Animate) – 8:Display Table :‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(STORE)1(LIST‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻌﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 26‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 522
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :fx-CG20 AU‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ Picture Plot‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ )ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺴﻘﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 523
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪ (T‬ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪ (X, Y‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ T-X‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ .T-Y‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ‪T-X‬‬ ‫)ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ ،X-Y‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪ SKETCH‬ﻭ ‪ G-SOLVE‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 524
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫• }‪ ... {OPEN‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ‪.g3p/g3b‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DELETE‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.g3p/g3b‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {SEARCH‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.g3p/g3b‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DETAIL‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11-6‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• }‪ ... {FILE‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {OPEN‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {SAVE‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 525
‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‬ ‫• }‪ ... {AXTRNS‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛـ }‪ {AXTRNS‬ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ"‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {EDIT‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DEL • BTM‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DEL-ALL‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {SET‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪) (T‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(15-15‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {JUMP‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {BOTTOM}/{TOP‬ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ{‪}/‬ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ{‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 526
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﲟﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ... g3p‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ... g3b‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪.http://edu.casio.com‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ g3p‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 527
‫‪ u‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 528
‫‪ u‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.K1(FILE)3(SAVE • AS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪ ROOT‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫• ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(OPEN‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(SAVE • AS‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 529
‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ ،K3(EDIT‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(15-9‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ‪ 50‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ .g3p‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،g3b‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ )‪.
PAGE 530
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.K6(g)3(EDIT‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ K2(Plot)K3(EDIT‬ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﹼﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ T-‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(15-14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ d‬ﻭ ‪ e‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 531
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ ،K6(g)4(DELETE‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(No‬ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(15-14‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ Y=f(x‬ﻭ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ Y=f(x‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 532
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ*‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ .3(X2‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪*.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 5(COPY‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ Y=f(x‬ﻭ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(15-10‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.
PAGE 533
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ ,‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪AXTRANS‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ AXTRANS‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(15-14‬ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪ !6(G⇔T‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،AXTRANS‬ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪!6(G⇔T‬‬ ‫)‪!6(G⇔T‬‬ ‫)‪!6(G⇔T‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ )ﺑﻬﺖ ‪ (I/O‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪) 0%‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ( ﺍﻟﻰ ‪) 100%‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ( ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟـ ‪ 100%‬ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 534
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ(‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ )‪ ،(X, Y‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪ (T‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ T-X‬ﺍﻭ ‪.(AXTRANS) T-Y‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 535
‫‪ u‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ X-‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ Y-‬ﻟﻠﺨﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 3(DEL • BTM‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ X-‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ Y-‬ﻷﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪ 3(DEL • BTM‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 3(DEL • BTM‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪.
PAGE 536
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪(T‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.5(SET‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،1.5‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.bwb.fw‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) w‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(J‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ T‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–1.0E+10 < Start < 1.
PAGE 537
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،AXTRANS‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Grid‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Off‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ "Label‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ "‪ ."On‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟـ"‪ ،"Axes‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ "‪ "On‬ﺃﻭ "‪ ."Scale‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "Off‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻰ "‪ "On‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،AXTRANS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ T-‬ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ "Axtrans‬ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 538
‫)‪ (3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪) (2‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 2(Cutout‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ d‬ﻭ ‪ e‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳉﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ AXTRANS‬ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 539
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ !1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ !5‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪" ... !1(TRACE‬ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5-52‬‬ ‫• )‪" ... !2(ZOOM‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5-8‬‬ ‫• )‪" ... !3(V-WIN‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪) "(View Window‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5-5‬‬ ‫• )‪" ... !4(SKETCH‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻣﺨﻄﻂ(" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5-50‬‬ ‫• )‪" ...
PAGE 540
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔ‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Syntax‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ma ERROR‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻄﺄ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ )ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺼﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ‪.
PAGE 541
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Non-Real‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Real‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Can’t Simplify‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪) 'Simp‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(2-26‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻟـ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ‪.
PAGE 542
‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Invalid List,‬‬ ‫‪Matrix or‬‬ ‫‪Vector‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Dimension‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 543
‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Range‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪No Variable‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 544
‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Condition‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪1(GRAPH)4(SELECT‬‬ ‫‪Data in use‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑـ "‪) "Resid List‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ( ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺛﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺏ "‪.
PAGE 545
‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Range‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺼﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Circular‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ )ﻣﺜﻞ "‪ "= A1‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪(A1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪.
PAGE 546
‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Memory‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Folder has‬‬ ‫‪over 300 files.
PAGE 547
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪File System‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻫﺎﻡ!"‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(12-4‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 548
‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Complex‬‬ ‫‪Number in‬‬ ‫‪Data‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻟـ ‪.CFX-9850G‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 549
‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪First select a‬‬ ‫‪segment.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪First select a‬‬ ‫‪line and point.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪First select‬‬ ‫‪2 points or a‬‬ ‫‪segment.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 550
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪First configure‬‬ ‫‪animation‬‬ ‫‪settings.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲢﺮﻙ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Cannot Add‬‬ ‫‪Animation‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.
PAGE 551
‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Too many‬‬ ‫‪plots‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Out of Domain‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Invalid setting‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.
PAGE 552
‫• ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪No Data‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪No File‬‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﻦ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ (20‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 553
‫‪ .2‬ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪sinx‬‬ ‫‪cosx‬‬ ‫‪tanx‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪|x| < 9 × (109)° (DEG‬‬ ‫)‪|x| < 5 × 107π rad (RAD‬‬ ‫)‪|x| < 1 × 1010 grad (GRA‬‬ ‫‪sin–1x‬‬ ‫‪cos–1x‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1‬‬ ‫‪tan–1x‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫‪sinhx‬‬ ‫‪coshx‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 230.
PAGE 554
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫”’ ‪°‬‬ ‫‪|a|, b, c < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫‪0 < b, c‬‬ ‫⎯←‬ ‫”’ ‪°‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 107‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫‪ ±1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ‪*.‬‬ ‫‪:x > 0‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫)‪^(xy‬‬ ‫‪–1 × 10‬‬ ‫‪< ylogx < 100‬‬ ‫‪y>0:x=0‬‬ ‫‪m :x<0‬‬ ‫–––– ‪y = n,‬‬ ‫‪2n+1‬‬ ‫"‬ ‫"‬ ‫)ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ‪(m, n‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ؛‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪–1 × 10 < y log |x| < 100‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺤﺠﺞ‪.
PAGE 555
E-CON3 Application (English)
PAGE 556
Important! • All explanations in this section assume that you are fully familiar with all calculator and Data Logger (CMA CLAB* or CASIO EA-200) precautions, terminology, and operational procedures. • The E-CON3 application is designed to get the most out of the measurement functions of the CASIO EA-200 Data Logger. Though it can run on a CMA CLAB Data Logger, CLAB does not have a SONIC port, microphone, or speaker as is equipped on the EA-200.
PAGE 557
ε-1 E-CON3 Overview 1. E-CON3 Overview • From the Main Menu, enter the E-CON3 mode. E-CON3 Main Menu • The E-CON3 mode provides the functions listed below for simple and more efficient data sampling using a Data Logger. • 1(SET) ...............Displays a screen for setting up a Data Logger. • 2(MEMORY) ......Displays a screen for saving Data Logger setup data under a file name. • 3(PROGRAM) ....Performs program conversion.
PAGE 558
ε-2 Using the Setup Wizard 2. Using the Setup Wizard This section explains how to use the Setup Wizard to configure the Data Logger setup quickly and easily simply by replying to questions as they appear. k Setup Wizard Parameters Setup Wizard lets you make changes to the following three Data Logger basic sampling parameters using an interactive wizard format. • Sensor (Select Sensor) • Total Sampling Time • Sampling Time Unit (Select Unit) Note the following rules whenever you use the Setup Wizard.
PAGE 559
ε-3 Using the Setup Wizard 5. Select the options for the sensor you specified in step 4. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the option you want to select, and then press w. • If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, advance to step 6. Important! When special settings are required by the sensor and/or option you select, other screens other than the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen will appear on the display.
PAGE 560
ε-4 Using the Setup Wizard 9. If there is no problem with the contents of the confirmation screen, press 1. If you need to change the setup, press 6 or J. This will return to the screen in step 6 (for setting the total sampling interval), where you can change the setting. • Pressing 1 will take you to the final Setup Wizard screen. 10. Press number keys described below to specify what you want to do with the setup you have configured. b(Start Setup) ................
PAGE 561
ε-5 Using the Setup Wizard k Using Setup Wizard to Configure a Photogate Setup Connection of a Vernier or CMA Photogate requires configuration of setup parameters that are slightly different from parameters for other types of sensors. • To configure a setup for Photogate alone 1. On the E-CON3 main menu, press 1(SET)1(WIZARD) to start the setup wizard. • This displays the “Select Sensor” dialog box. 2. If you are using a Vernier Photogate alone, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate].
PAGE 562
ε-6 Using the Setup Wizard k Outputting the Waveform of a Function through the Speaker (EA-200 only) Normally, the Setup Wizard helps you configure setups for sensors connected to a Data Logger. If you select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)] on the “Select Sensor” screen, however, it configures the EA-200 to output the sound that corresponds to a function that you input and graph on the calculator. • To configure a setup for speaker output 1.
PAGE 563
ε-7 Using the Setup Wizard 9. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the end point of the output, and then press w to register it. • After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown below appears on the display. → 10. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want. • To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one octave, input a value of 200%.
PAGE 564
ε-8 Using Advanced Setup 3. Using Advanced Setup Advanced Setup provides you with total control over a number of parameters that you can adjust to configure the Data Logger setup that suits your particular needs. k Advanced Setup Operations • To configure a Data Logger setup using Advanced Setup The following procedure describes the general steps for using Advanced Setup. Refer to the pages as noted for more information. 1. Display the E-CON3 main menu (page ε-1). 2. Press 1(SET).
PAGE 565
ε-9 Using Advanced Setup 6. After you configure a setup, you can use the function key operations described below to start sampling or perform other operations. • 1(START) ..........Starts sampling using the setup (page ε-30). • 2(MULTI) ...........Starts MULTIMETER mode sampling using the setup (page ε-23). • 3(MEMORY) ......Saves the setup (page ε-24). • 4(PROGRAM) ....Converts the setup to a program (page ε-27). • 5(GRAPH) .........
PAGE 566
ε-10 Using Advanced Setup 3. What you need to do next depends on the currently selected channel. • CH1, CH2, or CH3 Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to the selected channel. 1(CASIO)..............Displays a menu of CASIO sensors. 2(VERNIR) ...........Displays a menu of Vernier sensors. 3(CMA) .................Displays a menu of CMA sensors. 4(CUSTOM) .........Displays a menu of custom probes. 5(None) ................
PAGE 567
ε-11 Using Advanced Setup Note • When you select a channel on the Channel Setup screen, the sampling range of the selected channel appears in the bottom line of the screen. In the above example, the range of the temperature sensor assigned to CH2 appears on the display. If the sampling range value is too long to fit on the display, only the part of the value that fits on the display will be shown. k Sample Setup The Sample Setup screen lets you configure a number of settings that control sampling.
PAGE 568
ε-12 Using Advanced Setup • Note that the mode you select also determines the channel(s) you can use. Sampling Mode Selectable Channel(s) Real-time, Extended, Normal CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC Fast CH1, Mic Sound Mic Clock, Period CH1 3. To change the sampling interval setting, move the highlighting to “Interval”. Next, press 1 to display a dialog box for specifying the sampling interval. • The range of values you can select depends on the current sampling mode setting.
PAGE 569
ε-13 Using Advanced Setup Important! • When the following condition exists, an “FFT Graph” setting appears in place of the “Warm-up” setting. See “To configure the FFT Graph setting” below, for information about configuring the “FFT Graph” setting. - Sampling mode (page ε-11): Fast 6. After all the settings are the way you want, press w. • This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.
PAGE 570
ε-14 Using Advanced Setup • To configure Trigger Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press d(Trigger). • This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the “Source” line highlighted. • The function menu items that appears in the menu bar depend on the sampling mode selected with Sample Setup (page ε-11). The nearby screen shows the function menu when “Normal” is selected as the sample sampling mode. 2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
PAGE 571
ε-15 Using Advanced Setup • To specify the countdown start time 1. Move the highlighting to “Timer”. 2. Press 1(Time) to display a dialog box for specifying the countdown start time. 3. Input a value in seconds from 1 to 10. 4. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu. • To specify microphone sensitivity 1. Move the highlighting to “Sense” and then press one of the function keys described below.
PAGE 572
ε-16 Using Advanced Setup • To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and trigger end edge settings Perform the following steps when “Period” is specified as the sampling mode (page ε-11). 1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”. 2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is value that data needs to attain before sampling starts. 3. Input the value you want. 4. Move the highlighting to “Start to”. 5. Press one of the function keys described below.
PAGE 573
ε-17 Using Advanced Setup • To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level 1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”. 2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is value that data needs to attain before sampling starts. 3. Input the value you want, and then press w. 4. Move the highlighting to “Level”. 5. Press one of the function keys described below. To select this type of level: Press this key: Below 1(Below) Above 2(Above) 6.
PAGE 574
ε-18 Using Advanced Setup 3. To change the trace operation coordinate display setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “Coord”. Next, press one of the function keys described below. To specify this coordinate display setting for the trace operation: Press this key: Display trace coordinates 1(On) Hide trace coordinates 2(Off) 4. To change the numeric axes display setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “Econ Axes”.
PAGE 575
ε-19 Using a Custom Probe 4. Using a Custom Probe You can use the procedures in this section to configure a custom probe for use with a Data Logger. Important! • The sensors (CASIO, Vernier, CMA) that appear on the list during Channel Setup (page ε-9) are E-CON3 mode standard sensors. If you want to use a sensor that is not included in the list, configure custom probe settings. • A sensor with an output voltage in the range of 0 to 5 volts can be configured with E-CON3 as a custom probe.
PAGE 576
ε-20 Using a Custom Probe 7. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99). • This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the Custom Probe List, which should now contain the new custom probe setup you configured. • To recall the specifications of a Vernier or CMA sensor and configure custom probe settings 1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup” on page ε-19. 2. Press 4(VERNIR) or 5(CMA). • This displays a sensor list. 3.
PAGE 577
ε-21 Using a Custom Probe 3. Press 2(CALIB). • This will start the first sampling operation with the sensor connected to Data Logger’s CH1, and then display a screen like the one shown below. First sampling operation Real-time display of sampled values 4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds. • This will register the first sampled value and display it on the screen. At this time the cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value. 5.
PAGE 578
ε-22 Using a Custom Probe k Zero Adjusting a Custom Probe This procedure zero adjusts a custom probe and sets its intercept value based on an actual sample using the applicable custom probe. • To zero adjust a custom probe 1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the custom probe you want to zero adjust to CH1 of the Data Logger. 2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for zero adjusting, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
PAGE 579
ε-23 Using the MULTIMETER Mode 5. Using the MULTIMETER Mode You can use the Channel Setup screen (page ε-9) to configure a channel so that Data Logger MULTIMETER mode sampling is triggered by a calculator operation. • To use the MULTIMETER mode 1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the sensors you want to the applicable Data Logger channels. 2. From the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8), use the Channel Setup screen (page ε-9) to configure sensor setups for each channel you will be using. 3.
PAGE 580
ε-24 Using Setup Memory 6. Using Setup Memory Creating Data Logger setup data using the Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup causes the data to be stored in the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current setup memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data. You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.
PAGE 581
ε-25 Using Setup Memory k Using and Managing Setups in Setup Memory All of the setups you save are shown in the setup memory list. After selecting a setup in the list, you can use it to sample data or you can edit it. • To preview saved setup data You can use the following procedure to check the contents of a setup before you use it for sampling. 1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory list. 2.
PAGE 582
ε-26 Using Setup Memory • To change the name of setup data 1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory list. 2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want. 3. Press 3(RENAME). • This displays the screen for inputting the setup name. 4. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name, and then press w. • This changes the setup name and returns to the setup memory list. • To delete setup data 1.
PAGE 583
ε-27 Using Program Converter 7. Using Program Converter Program Converter converts a Data Logger setup you configured using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup to a program that can run on the calculator. You can also use Program Converter to convert a setup to a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series-compatible program.*1 *2 *1 See the documentation that came with your scientific calculator or EA-200 for information about how to use a converted program.
PAGE 584
ε-28 Using Program Converter 3. Specify the scientific calculator model to be associated with the program. Perform one of the following key operations to associate the program with a scientific calculator.
PAGE 585
ε-29 Using Program Converter 7. Enter up to eight characters for the password. • If you change your mind about assigning a password, press J here. This will cause the password input field to disappear and cancel password input. 8. After everything is the way you want, press w to convert the program in accordance with the setup. • The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message and return to the screen that was on the display in step 1, press w or J.
PAGE 586
ε-30 Starting a Sampling Operation 8. Starting a Sampling Operation This section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-CON3 mode to start a Data Logger sampling operation. k Before getting started... Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger. 1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger. 2. Turn on Data Logger power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate Data Logger channel. 4.
PAGE 587
ε-31 Starting a Sampling Operation 2. Press w. • This sets up the Data Logger using the setup data in the current setup memory area. • The message “Setting Data Logger...” remains on the display while Data Logger setup is in progress. You can cancel the setup operation any time this message is displayed by pressing A. • The screen shown nearby appears after Data Logger setup is complete. 3. Press w to start sampling.
PAGE 588
Clock Period Extended Sound Normal Fast Real-time Mode 1. Data Logger Setup Starts Sampling 2. Start Standby Pressing 1 advances to “4. Graphing”. Pressing w there returns to “3. Sampling”. • The screen shown below appears when CH1, SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger. 3. Sampling 1 w Sample values are stored as List data only. The following three graph types can be produced when Photogate-Pulley is being used. 1. Time and distance graph • When Number of Samples > 1 2.
PAGE 589
ε-33 Using Sample Data Memory 9. Using Sample Data Memory Performing a Data Logger sampling operation from the E-CON3 mode causes sampled results to be stored in the “current data area” of E-CON3 memory. Separate data is saved for each channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that channel’s “current data”. Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is replaced by the newly sampled data.
PAGE 590
ε-34 Using Sample Data Memory 4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number. 5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input. The sample data file you save is indicated on the display using the format: :.
PAGE 591
ε-35 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 10. Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data. k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
PAGE 592
ε-36 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis mode to drawing a graph. Note • Step 4 through step 7 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any step automatically applies the initial default values for its settings. • If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the top line of the Graph Mode screen.
PAGE 593
ε-37 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 3. Press 2(DATA). • This displays the Sampling Data List screen. 4. Specify the sampled data for graphing. a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASSIGN) or w. • This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file you selected. Sample data file name Graph on/off indicator Name of sensor used for sampling Graph Mode Screen b.
PAGE 594
ε-38 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want. To specify this graph style: Press this key: Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers 1( ) Line graph with square ( ~ ) data markers 2( ) Line graph with X (×) data markers 3( ) Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers 4( ) Scatter graph with square ( ~ ) data markers 5( ) Scatter graph with X (×) data markers 6( ) c.
PAGE 595
ε-39 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 11. Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after drawing a graph. You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation, or by the operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on page ε-36.
PAGE 596
ε-40 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations Key Operation Description K5(Y=fx) Displays the graph relation list, which lets you select a Y=f(x) graph to overlay on the sampled result graph. See “Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph” on page ε-45. K6(SPEAKER) Starts an operation for outputting a specific range of a sound data waveform graph from the speaker (EA-200 only). See “Outputting a Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker” on page ε-48.
PAGE 597
ε-41 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range whose periodic frequency you want to obtain. • This causes the period and periodic frequency value at the start point you selected in step 2 to appear along the bottom of the screen. 4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha memory variables. • This displays a dialog box for specifying variable names for [Period] and [Frequency] values.
PAGE 598
ε-42 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Press w. • This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode. • The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode. To do this: Press this cursor key: Enlarge the graph image horizontally e Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally d Enlarge the graph image vertically f Reduce the size of the graph image vertically c 4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
PAGE 599
ε-43 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. After everything is the way you want, press w. • This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the graph screen. • For details about using list data, see Chapter 3 of this manual. Note • Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SELECT) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In this case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).
PAGE 600
ε-44 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of the Fourier series. 6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w. • The graph relation list appears with the calculation result. 7. Pressing 6(DRAW) here graphs the function. • This lets you compare the expanded function graph and the original graph to see if they are the same.
PAGE 601
ε-45 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations • To perform quadratic regression 1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(CALC). • The CALC menu appears at the bottom of the display. 2. Press 5(X2). • This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph. 3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for which you want to perform quadratic regression, and then press w. 4.
PAGE 602
ε-46 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Working with Multiple Graphs The procedures in this section explain how you can zoom or move a particular graph when there are multiple graphs on the display. • To zoom a particular graph on a multi-graph display 1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT). • The EDIT menu appears at the bottom of the display. 2. Press 1(ZOOM). • This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen. 3.
PAGE 603
ε-47 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. Press w. • This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode. • The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode. To do this: Press this cursor key: Enlarge the graph image horizontally e Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally d Enlarge the graph image vertically f Reduce the size of the graph image vertically c → 6. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
PAGE 604
ε-48 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Outputting a Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker (EA-200 only) Use the following procedure to output a specific range of a sound data waveform graph from the speaker. • To output a graph from the speaker 1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 6(SPEAKER). • This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph. 2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range you want to output from the speaker, and then press w. 3.
PAGE 605
ε-49 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 8. If you want to retry output from the speaker, press 1(Yes). To exit the procedure and return to the graph screen, press 6(No). • Pressing 1(Yes) returns to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. From there, repeat the above steps from step 4. k Configuring View Window Parameters Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View Window function key menu along the bottom of the display.
PAGE 606
ε-50 Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity 12. Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity You can call E-CON3 functions from an eActivity by including an “Econ strip” in the eActivity file. The following describes each of the four available Econ strips. • Econ SetupWizard strip This strip calls the E-CON3 Setup Wizard. The Econ SetupWizard strip makes it possible to perform the following series of operations from the eActivity: Data Logger setup using the Setup Wizard R Sampling R Graphing.
PAGE 607
Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: Casio Europe GmbH Casio-Platz 1 22848 Norderstedt, Germany www.casio-europe.
PAGE 608
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan SA1511-C © 2013 CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.